Home

Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User`s Manual

image

Contents

1. o amp amp amp 3 amp G E amp ag 9 8 J L lo o Bus Interface Unit Bus ena Unit Terminal Block AARNE EE TF SI S Oo 2 Ja Q to BS S ms OHS LS 2raH E l 2 m k a He 2 l 2 a 246 o Micro 5 Field Processor ial Hota ir T 8 g a H H HS o 2 i Il S o e i O Ek I lt IIHs 2 A gt 2118 o S S I O Terminal Auxiliary Block Terminal Blocks 1 0 Modules 1 2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Genius Bus Interface Unit The Genius Bus Interface Unit IC670GBI002 or IC697GBI102 interfaces Field Control I O modules to a host PLC or computer via a Genius bus It can exchange up to 128 bytes of input data and 128 bytes of output data with the host each Genius bus scan It can also handle Genius datagram communications
2. Installing the DIN Rail All Field Control Terminal Blocks must be mounted on a 7 5mm x 35mm DIN rail The rail must have a conductive unpainted finish for proper grounding For best vibration resistance the DIN rail should be installed on a panel using screws spaced approximately 6 inches 5 24cm apart When using multiple rail sections be sure they are properly aligned Chapter 3 Installation 3 5 3 6 Mount the DIN rail at least 4 25 inches 10 80 cm from any wireway or other obstruction on the wiring side of the Bus Interface Unit Allow more space if the wiring for I O modules is very stiff A wiring template is also provided in the instruction sheet included with each Bus Interface Unit terminal block Drill mounting holes for the BIU Terminal Block as shown below Allow a small tolerance between the top and bottom of adjacent terminal blocks After mounting the terminal blocks on the DIN rail as described on the following pages use 6 screws not supplied to attach them to the panel Length for all screws is 3 8 inch 9 525mm 5 90in T Wireway 14 99cm in ot l 1 i it A tl aN E a i 1 bike li 1 ee i Yoo ol II a 1 tt i 1 j E CIN i P a l ii tt ie 11 a i LA J i l 1 ate ie tl A 1 i
3. a Is In this example two group moves are used to transfer the ce following data 2 Group 1 from the Smart Analog Input Module to the 2 Micro Field Processor Slot 0 8 The second byte of I data which contains diagnostic status information about the module is to be moved to MFP z memory starting at 10017 v Also the second channel of analog input AT data is to be o a moved to MFP memory starting at A1002 8 siot The data group will be moved on BIU sweeps 1 and 9 out 18 A of 1 through 16 He 2 The group move would be O ia Source Slot 2 the analog input module 3 A Destination Slot 1 the Micro Field Processor Kets p Slot2 Move 1 Source Location 1009 start of second nepa byte 2 3 Move 1 Destination Location 10017 Move 1 Data Length 1 byte Move 2 Source Location Al002 start of second input Move 2 Destination Location Al002 Move 2 Data Length 2 bytes Sweep Selections 1 and 9 only Group 2 from the Micro Field Processor to the Smart Analog Input Module Data from MFP memory starting at Q0017 is to be moved to the module s Q memory used to clear module faults The data group will be moved on BIU sweeps 4 and 12 The group move would be Source Slot 1 the Micro Field Processor Destination Slot 2 the analog input module Move 1 Source Location Q0017
4. Slot Module Type Memory Type References Used Data Type Length 0 Bus Interface Unit I bits These references are the ones Q bits transferred on the Genius bus AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words 1 I bits Q bits AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words 2 I bits Q bits AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words 3 I bits Q bits AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words 4 I bits Q bits AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words 5 I bits Q bits AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words 6 I bits Q bits AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words 7 I bits Q bits AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words 8 I bits Q bits AI 2 byte words AQ 2 byte words Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F 1 For each data type to be exchanged on the bus enter a starting address and a length This screen shows the data type I and a starting address 00001 for discrete input data Blk Map Start I 100001 lt gt entr 2 You can edit the address or press F4 to accept it Then enter a length in bits for the I data For example Blk Map Lngth I 64 lt gt entr 3 Press F4 entr to accept the value 4 Continue as above entering starting addresses and lengths for the other data types Lengths for AI and AQ are 2 byte words Note The lengths entered must not add up to more than 128 bytes of inputs discr
5. Diagnostic reference address MSB Fault Bytes 6 and 7 Fault bytes 6 and 7 datagram bytes 5 and 6 are interpreted by the Series 90 70 Bus Controller automatically They are not relevant to other types of host byte 5 7 6 5 4 312 1 0 Number of Series 90 70 fault entries to set bit 7 1 OR Fault byte mask for S90 70 Bus Controller dual port bit 7 0 Fault entire I O module byte 6 Entity offset into diagnostic table Fault entire Bus Interface Unit 8 6 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configuration Data oF For a Bus Interface Unit the data format of configuration data transferred by Read Configuration BIU Reply and Write Configuration datagrams is slightly different than the format for other Genius 0 devices Instead of an offset the data specifies the slot number of a specific device in the Field 2 Control Station The length specified must exactly match the length of the configuration data for 1 the module Bus Interface Unit or other module in the station partial configuration data cannot be Lel written For programming instructions you will need to refer to the Bus Controller User s Manual for the PLC For the Series 90 70 PLC COMREQ 15 must be used with a Re
6. S 1 0 16 Q01785 9001800 lt gt del zoom See the instructions on the next two pages to configure the slot Module Present Read Zoom to configure Module Present Read Enter to configure or No Module Present Select Special I O to configure No Module Present Select Generic I O to configure Analog 16 Point Grouped Input Module IC670ALG240 Analog 8 volt In Discrete Input 4 8 Analog 8 Point Voltage Input Module IC670ALG28 1 Analog 8 cur In Discrete Input 16 Analog 16 Point Voltage Input Module IC670ALG282 Analog 4 cur Out Discrete Output 4 8 Analog Voltage Output Module IC670ALG310 ESCP 8 Disc Out Analog Current source Output Module IC670ALG330 Analog RTD Input Module IC670ALG620 Analog Thermocouple Input Module IC670ALG630 Micro Field Processor IC670MFP100 Combo Disc 10 06 Discrete Output 16 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Configuration with No Module Present If the module is not present in the selected slot press the F3 tgl key to specify a module type The following screen will appear S 1 I O Type S 1 I O Type Special I O OR Generic I O tgl entr tgl entr 1 Press F3 tgl to select Generic I O or Special I O Then press F4 entr 2 Use the F3 tg
7. NETPRES I0017 ADD_ MOVE_ INT INT STOUTS R0001 I1 Q RO001 R0001 IN O Q0001 LE CONST 00001 00001 I2 lt lt RUNG 9 STEP 0009 gt gt ALW_ON s0007 INT R0001 I1 Q MOVE INT CONST 32767 2 CONSTI IN Q RO0001 00000 LE 00001 END OF PROGRAM LOGIC 4 20 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Chapter Station Configuration 5 This chapter explains how to configure a Bus Interface Unit and the I O modules in a station using a Hand held Monitor HHM version 4 6 IC660HHM501J or later is required Note that the BIU and I O modules can also be configured via datagrams from the host Datagram formats are detailed in chapter 8 Setting up the serial bus address and baud rate Special instructions for Series 90 70 PLC systems Set up the Hand held Monitor Display the configuration menu Genius configuration e Select the baud rate e Select the serial bus address for the Bus Interface Unit e Select a Series Six or Series Five PLC reference address e Configure fault reporting e Configure Genius bus redundancy e Configure CPU redundancy e Select configuration protection e Reference address configuration E Module Configuration e Read a module configuration e Delete or edit an existing module configuration e Select a module type e Configure specific I O modules e Configure a Micro
8. Terminating Start End Terminating Resistor of Bus of Bus Resistor V 7 I Serial 1 Serial 1 Serial 2 Serial 2 Shield In ia Shield In Shield Out io 2 Shield Out Terminating a Bus If either bus will terminate at the Bus Interface Unit connect a 75 100 120 or 150 ohm terminating resistor across the Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals Appendix C lists the correct impedance to use for each recommended type of bus cable Note If the Bus Interface Unit will be powered up when not connected to a properly terminated bus connect a 75 ohm resistor across its Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals to assure proper powerup Using Prefabricated Terminating Resistors Prefabricated molded connectors with terminating resistors are available for 75 ohms catalog number IC660BLMS508 and 150 ohms IC660BLMS506 They can be used with conventional bus cable and with the cables with pre molded connectors Attach the prefabricated resistor to the female cable end as shown below H M H M Underside of prefabricated HH resistor showing projection T es Slide prefabricated resistor onto n H A i female cable end GFK 0825F Chapter 3 Installation 3 11 Installing Pre Molde d Bus Cables Pre molded cables must be installed in the orientation shown below The main bus cable exits toward the power connections The optiona
9. Byte Description Byte Description 14 Number of input reference parameters 2 46 47 RTD type for input 1 0 10 Ohm PtL amp N 15 Number of output reference parameters 2 1 25 Ohm PtIPTS 68 16 17 Byte length of analog input data 0 8 25233 OAM PLO degC Lab Std alpha 00392 3 100 Ohm Pt DIN43760 alpha 00385 18 19 Memory type for the module s analog input data 4 100 Ohm Pt Burns S pecial alpha 003902 usually type Al Enter one of the following numbers 5 100 Ohm Pt IPTS 68 alpha 00392 18 Q table 6 98 13 Ohm Pt SAMA RC21 4 alpha 003923 10 Al table 7 100 Ohm Pt J ISC 1604 81 alpha 003916 12 AQ table 8 1K Ohm Pt alpha 00375 20 21 Relative offset from start of table a A E 22 23 Byte length of discrete diagnostic input data 0 4 11 50 Ohm Cu alpha 00427 12 100 Ohm Cu alpha 00427 24 25 Memory type for the module s diagnostic input bits 13 100 Ohm Ni IPTS 68 usually type I Enter one of the numbers listed above 14 100 Ohm Ni 0 deg C DIN43760 alpha 00618 F 15 120 Ohm Ni 0 deg C alpha 00672 26 27 Relative offset from start of table 16 604 Ohm Ni Fe 0 deg F alpha 00518 28 29 Byte length of control output bits 0 or 1 17 1K Ohm NifFe 70 deg F alpha 00527 18 500 Ohm span requires conversion type O 30 31 Memory type for the module s control output bits 19 3000 Ohm span requires conversion type O usually type Q Enter one of the numbers listed
10. m 00 ote SSD IBSIKIBISISISSIS Terminal Block Connection Cable 0000 0000 O 000000000 t f 60000000 00000000 L j We I O Terminal Block 4 7 oT o j 0000000 0000000 Connector for Cable to Next Device After installing the cable be sure it is firmly seated on both connectors 3 8 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Power Wiring to the Bus Interface Unit Note Do not apply power until the BIU module is installed on the Terminal Block 1 Connect an appropriate power source as shown below See rov Low Voltage High Voltage Connections amp Connections Q amp Q IC670GB1002 IC670GBII02 IQ z l Fa TIF a Q Mae HS 24 VDC et 18 ve H8 125VDC For BIU version IC670GBI102 if a DC supply is used the polarity is not important BIU version IC670GBI102 provides internal overvoltage protection Terminal 4 is normally connected to frame ground terminal 3 by a factory installed jumper If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream this feature can be disabled by removing the jumper leaving pin 4 unconnected 2 Use one AW
11. Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you exit the I O configuration choices are not saved The BIU will not send data to the module until all three data types I Q and AQ have been configured Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure Data Defaults Data default screens are displayed next For the module s diagnostic input bits data type I you can determine what the BIU should do with the data if the BIU loses communications with the module Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero S 1 Module gt Gl DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr You can accept DEFAULT ZERO with the F4 enter key or press F3 toggle then F4 enter to change the default and save it S 1 Module gt I DEFAULT HOLD lt gt tgl entr For the module s fault clearing discrete output bits AQ and Q you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network Selectable values are ZERO and HOLD S 1 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr S 1 Network gt AQ DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr In an TO station that includes local I O control some or all of the module s outputs may be assigned to addresses that are not within the BIU s I O map The defaults configured here do NOT apply to module outputs that are ou
12. C If you want to assign specific references enter the starting address Press F4 entr For most applications all module references should fall within the network map configured for the Bus Interface Unit For local control a module can be configured outside the BIU network map In addition each data type I Q AI AQ has a total of 256 bytes allocated within the BIU So for each data type all references must be located within a 256 byte range For example if the starting address for output data configured for the Bus Interface Unit was Q01024 all module outputs would need to be located between Q01024 and Q03072 Discrete references are assigned on byte boundaries Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type To edit the module s configuration press F4 zoom Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Module Fault Reporting On the next screen configure whether or not the Bus Interface Unit will report faults from this module to the network controller S1 Report Faults YES lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the current selection press F3 tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the entry Press F2 gt to return to the original slot configuration screen Default Inputs or Hold Last State Next configure what
13. Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Required Genius and Host System Equipment The following system equipment is required Genius Hand held Monitor version 4 6 IC660HHMS01J or later For a Series 90 70 PLC O Series 90 70 CPU firmware release 3 0 or later OA Series 90 70 Genius Bus Controller release 3 0 or later The Bus Controller must be 4 0 or later for full diagnostics display from Logicmaster 90 70 or for redundancy applications O If Logicmaster 90 70 programming and configuration software is used it must be release 3 0 or later A IC641SWP701F 3 5 2DD 5 25 2S HD B IC641SWP704C 5 25 2S 2D For a Series 90 30 PLC O Series 90 30 CPU firmware any version O Logicmaster 90 30 programming and configuration software any version O Series 90 30 Genius Bus Controller any version For a Series Six PLC O CPU rev 105 or later O Logicmaster 6 Programming Software release 4 02 or later O Bus Controllers IC660CBB902 or 903 version 1 7 or later For a Series Five PLC O CPU rev 3 2 catalog number with E suffix or later O Logicmaster 5 Programming Software release 2 01 or later O Bus Controller any version For a Host Computer O PCIM any version O QBIM any version Chapter I Introduction 1 9 Using Field Control in a CPU Redundancy System Most systems use only one Bus Controller and CPU to control the I O on the Genius bus CP
14. Slot 6 8 Channel Analog Input Module IC670ALG230 A100001 A100008 Slot 7 High level 16 Channel Analog Input Module IC670ALG240 analog inputs diagnostic inputs control outputs AI00009 AI00024 100025 100112 Q00025 Q00040 Slot 8 4 Channel Analog Output Module IC670ALG320 AQO00001 AQ00004 GFK 0825F Appendix D Configuration Examples D 3 2 Example 4 Discrete and Analog Data Network and Local Processing and Group Data Moves In this T O Station there are discrete and analog I O modules and a Micro Field Processor Group Data Moves are used to transfer data within the I O Station This configuration allows all station inputs to be solved by the Micro Field Processor and all station outputs to be controlled by the Micro Field Processor The system controller for example a PLC will receive all station inputs If the Micro Field Processor stops providing outputs the system controller will assume control of all station outputs BIU Map 100001 100168 Q00001 Q00056 AI00001 A100028 AQ00000 AQ00000 zero length Slot 1 synchronization is required Slot 1 Micro Field Processor IC670MFP100 Reference parameters zero length Slot 2 High level 16 Channel Analog Input Module IC670ALG240 Reference parameters zero length Slot 3 4 Channel RTD Input Module IC670ALG620 Reference parameters zero length Slot 4 8 Channel The
15. Data Transfer Between the BIU and the Host Genius Bus Scan Time Operation of the BIU with a Micro Field Processor Backing Up Micro Field Processor Outputs Backing Up BIU Outputs with a Micro Field Processor 4 1 BIU Data Handling at the I O Station 4 2 The BIU manages all movement of data within the I O station and between the I O station and the Genius bus The BIU scans the I O modules in the station exchanges data with the host and can manage the exchange of data between a Micro Field Processor and other modules in the station In addition to its regular I O scanning capabilities the BIU can also selectively transfer specific data groups from one intelligent module in the station to another All of the data for the I O station whether it is data that is exchanged on the Genius bus or local data utilizes the BIU s four I O data memories The BIU has 256 bytes of memory available for each of the four types of data discrete inputs and outputs data types I and Q and analog inputs and outputs data types AI and AQ During BIU configuration data for individual modules is assigned to specific areas of this memory BIU Memory Typically Used For Amount Available Highest Available Type in BIU Reference Address l discrete inputs and status data from 256 bytes 65535 intelligent modules Q discrete outputs and fault clearing for 256 bytes 65535 intelligent modules Al analog inputs 256 bytes 9999 AQ analog
16. However if a Hand held Programmer IC693PRG300 will be attached to a Micro Field Processor or other module in the I O Station it must be considered as a load component as listed above Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Hot Insertion Removal of Modules Bus Interface Units IC670GBI002 F and IC670GBI102A or later support Hot Insertion Removal of modules in the I O Station Hot Insertion Removal means that modules can be removed and replaced while I O Station power is applied without affecting the BIU or other modules in the I O Station Separate I O module power must be switched off to the module being inserted or removed Hot Insertion Removal requires the use of specific modules and I O terminal blocks e I O modules having catalog number suffix J or above These modules have a projecting alignment tab that fits into a corresponding alignment tab on I O Terminal Blocks listed below Note that modules with this tab can also be installed on older I O Terminal Blocks that do not have mating alignment tabs However Hot Insertion Removal are not supported in such an installation e I O Terminal Blocks IC670CHS101 102 or 103 These I O Terminal Blocks have projecting alignment tabs designed to facilitate Hot Insertion Removal of modules Modules that are earlier than revision J cannot be mounted on these terminal blocks T O Terminal Blocks IC670CHS001 002 and 003 w
17. Il zal l 2 i do K 61 lle doo kellne Pry Lower O 0 latch Removing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block from the DIN Rail 1 Loosen the clamp screw 2 Inserta small flat blade screwdriver into the upper latch and pry it outward Then pull up gently on the top of the terminal block to disengage the upper latch from the rail 3 Keep gently pulling the top of the terminal block away from the rail Insert the screwdriver into the lower latch and pry it outward to free the terminal block GFK 0825F Chapter 3 Installation 3 7 Installing the Cables Between Terminal Blocks Before installing modules on their terminal blocks install the connecting cable s between terminal blocks A short connecting cable as illustrated below is supplied with each I O Terminal Block A set of three connecting cables is available as renewal part number IC670CBLO01 Optional 21 inch 0 53 meter cable is also available IC670CBLO002 only one 21 cable can be used per Field Control station The illustration below shows cable connection between a Bus Interface Unit terminal block and an T O Terminal Block Make connections between I O Terminal Blocks in the same manner The connectors are keyed to assure proper installation C D o00000 000000 a 00000000 00000000 Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block 2000000000 0000000000 000000 000000
18. 7 Move all outputs within BIU network map from the Genius communications buffers to the BIU internal tables y 8 Read all reference input parameters from a Synchronization module pace 10 Send all outputs to conventional modules j j j j j i i i i i y l BIU Waits if MFP is busy 1 i j I i i j j j j j j j i j j j I Micro Field Processor Y MFP provides data to BIU The Bus Interface Unit receives output data for the backed up output module s from the Genius bus step 7 In step 8 the BIU receives data from the Micro Field Processor Any data with the same reference assignments overwrites the data already received from the bus When the BIU sends outputs to I O modules step 10 it sends the most recent contents of the output references If the MFP has not provided fresh output data for example if the MFP has stopped communicating with the BIU the outputs from the network are sent to the modules instead Note that this will not work if MFP outputs are configured to default instead of Hold Last State because selecting default causes the BIU to write default values into the output references at step 8 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Backing Up BIU Outputs with a Micro Field Processor The Micro Field Processor can take over contro
19. FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual GFK 0825F October 1999 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility fo
20. For more information refer to these publications Field Control I O Modules User s Manual GFK 0826 This book describes Field Control I O Modules and I O Terminal Blocks and explains how to install them The Series 90 Micro Field Processor User s Manual GFK 1171 This book describes the Micro Field Processor IC670MFP 100 and provides installation procedures operation information and diagnostics information Genius I O System User s Manual GEK 90486 1 Reference manual for system designers programmers and others involved in integrating Genius I O products in a PLC or host computer environment This book provides a system overview and describes the types of systems that can be created using Genius products Datagrams Global Data and data formats are defined Series 90 30 Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 1034 Reference manual for the Bus Controller which interfaces a Genius bus to a Series 90 30 PLC This book describes the installation and operation of the Bus Controller Series Six Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 0171 Reference manual for the Bus Controller which interfaces a Genius bus to a Series Six PLC This book describes the installation and operation of the Bus Controller It also contains the programming information needed to interface Genius I O devices to a Series Six PLC Series Five Bus Controller User s Manual GFK 0248 Reference manual for the Bus Controller which interfaces a Genius bus to a
21. Forcing Unforcing the Displayed Reference Individual I O points can be forced and unforced from the Hand held Monitor the HHM s circuit forcing capability must be enabled to use this function Forcing an I O point changes its state in the Bus Interface Unit s EEPROM memory If the circuit is an output the physical state of the output also changes If the circuit is an input the forced input data is sent to the CPU Once forced a circuit retains the forced state or value if power is removed The forced circuit ignores data from an attached input device or output data from the CPU The force can ONLY be removed from the Hand held Monitor 1 Select the correct data type for forcing Binary for discrete I O or Decimal for analog I O Press F4 to change the data type I00001 0 B lt gt fre hex 2 Press the F3 force key to force the reference now being displayed 100001 1 B fre unfree Indicates force is in effect Current state or value I00001 0 B fre unfree 3 Press F3 force again Then use the HHM keypad to enter the force state or value 4 Use the F4 unforce key from the same screen when you want to unforce the point Chapter 7 Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data 7 5 Monitor Control I O Data Series 90 PLC If the host is a Series 90 PLC I O data can be displayed in the PLC s reference tables The PLC s reference tables displays will include those portio
22. I O memory operation with BIU 4 14 reference parameters T O module l Module current requirements let fi tion 5 21 i q vO a g 5 21 Module versions required for Hot Insertion 2 7 introduction Modules f locations for 3 5 BIU Terminal Block 1 3 read ID with HAHM 5 21 Bus Interface Unit 1 3 WO references Taaa Tmin cks 1 Analog Grouped Input module 5 40 5 48 5 56 Micro Field Processor 5 99 types of 1 2 GFK 0825F Index Index 3 Index Monitoring I O data with an HHM 7 3 Thermocouple module 5 77 Mounting clearances Read Configuration datagram 8 7 Mounting positions 3 5 Read Configuration Reply datagram 8 8 Mounting screws Read I O Forces datagram 8 32 Read Map datagram 6 3 N Read Map Reply datagram 8 3 Read Slot Diagnostics datagram 8 33 Network communications Redundancy disable f5 15 15 bus Noise 515l confi guring 5 11 preventing 3 3 bus providing transient protection 3 9 description 1 11 specifications 1 5 CPU configuring O description Reference address Offset Adjustment Reference Junction Compensation Thermocouple module 5 80 Thermocouple module 5 79 OK LED 2 2 Reference Junction Value Open Thermocouple diagnostic 5 75 Thermocouple module Operating mode Reference Parameters 4 6 Output Default Time 5 11 Output defaults 4 11 Outputs backing up with MFP 4 19 16 Point Grouped Analog Input module 5 40 8 Point Analog
23. provides an output current range of 4mA low span value to 20mA high span value for engineering units AI values of 4 000 to 20 000 On this screen specify the default range used for scaling analog output data There are three predetermined range and data scaling combinations selections 1 2 and 3 S 1 CH1 DEF RNG 1 lt gt tgl entr The default is 1 Selections or 2 have low span output current values which are greater than 3 5mA and therefore enable an Open Wire diagnostic bit which is set whenever the output falls below approximately 2mA NONE is used for display purposes only and cannot be selected if range 1 2 or 3 is being used see next section If you want to enter different scaling parameters than those used for selections 1 2 or 3 change the span and engineering units values from the scaling screens Selection Data Range Output current uA 1 4000 to 20000 4000 to 20000 2 0 to 32000 4000 to 20000 3 0 to 32000 0 to 20000 none User configured scaling The illustration below shows scaling for the default range selections 46771 Output Current in MicroAmps Maximum Output 20 48mA 20000 a ee 7 High Point 10000 4000 2 oes Low Point 4000 10000 20000 Commanded Value in Engineering Units 5 96 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Output Scaling If engineering
24. reference Indicates force is in effect Reference being monitored Current state or value Display mode B binary I00001 0 B H hex D decimal lt gt fre hex Changing the Reference Type Being Displayed Use the Fl lt key to select a reference type I discrete inputs Q discrete outputs AQ analog outputs or AI analog inputs Stepping Through the Configured References of the Displayed Type Use the F2 gt key to advance through the point reference screens for the selected reference type Displaying a Specific Reference If you want to go directly to a specific reference 1 Display the reference type I discrete inputs Q discrete outputs AQ analog outputs or AI analog inputs as described above 2 Press the HHM s key 3 Enter the reference number from the keypad 4 Press the F4 enter key Displaying References that are Outside the BIU s I O Map If you want to display a reference that lies outside the I O map that has been configured for the Bus Interface Unit follow the instructions for Displaying a Specific Reference Changing the Display Mode Use the F4 mode key to change the displayed point state or value to hex H binary B or decimal D format Returning to the Previous Menu From this screen press the HHM Clear key to return to the main Bus Interface Unit menu Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F
25. 1 Power wiring the plant power distribution and high power loads such as high horsepower motors These circuits may be rated from tens to thousands of KVA at 220 VAC or higher 2 Control wiring usually either low voltage DC or 120 VAC of limited energy rating Examples are wiring to start stop switches contactor coils and machine limit switches This is generally the interface level of the Genius discrete I O 3 Analog wiring transducer outputs and analog control voltages This is the interface level to Genius TO analog blocks 4 Communications and signal wiring the communications network that ties everything together including computer LANs MAP and Genius I O and communications bus These four types of wiring should be separated as much as possible to reduce the hazards from insulation failure miswiring and interaction noise between signals A typical PLC system with Genius I O may require some mixing of the latter three types of wiring particularly in cramped areas inside motor control centers and on control panels In general it is acceptable to mix the Genius bus cable with the I O wiring from the blocks as well as associated control level wiring All noise pickup is cumulative depending on both the spacing between wires and the distance span they run together I O wires and Genius bus cable can be placed randomly in a wiring trough for lengths of up to 50 feet If wiring is cord tied harnessed do not include the bus
26. 20MS lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Configure the Line Frequency Next set the line frequency for the module Select 50 or 60 Hz Disturbances due to AC noise cause variations around the desired DC level The amplitude of these variations can be reduced by configuring the rate at which the module scans inputs for the operating frequency If the line frequency is configured at 60 Hz the module scans each input channel every 1 04 milliseconds If the line frequency is configured at 50 Hz the module scans each input channel every 1 25 mS S 2 LINE FREQ 60 HZ lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the first circuit configuration screen GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 51 5 52 Circuit Configuration The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the Hand held Monitor and the BIU Channel Header If the BIU and Hand held Monitor support display of channel headers a header screen appears for each channel as shown below S 1 CH 1 CONFIG lt gt zoom A Press F2 gt from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel Pressing F2 gt from channel 8
27. All inputs are given to the Micro Field Processor and processed All outputs solved by the Micro Field Processor drive the station outputs All inputs from the station are sent back the the system controller as well The system controller sends outputs to all modules but as long as the Micro Field Processor is present system outputs are not used by the modules If the local Micro Field Processor should stop providing outputs the outputs received from the system controller will be used as station outputs BIU Map 100001 100112 Q00001 Q00040 A100001 A100024 AQ00001 AQ00004 Slot 1 synchronization is required Slot 1 Micro Field Processor IC670MFP100 Map BIU 100001 00112 to MFP 100001 00112 so all inputs on station become inputs to MFP Map BIU AI00001 00024 to MFP AI00001 00024 so all inputs on station become inputs to MFP Map BIU Q00001 00040 to MFP Q00001 00040 so all outputs from MFP control station outputs Map BIU AQ00001 00004 to MFP AQO0001 00004 so all outputs from MFP control station outputs Set all MFP default parameters to No Hold Last State Slot 2 12VDC 16 Point Pos Neg Input Module IC670MDL640 100001 100016 Slot 3 120VAC 8 Point Isolated Input Module IC670MDL242 100017 100024 Slot 4 5 12 24VDC 16 Point Output Module IC670MDL742 Q00001 Q00016 Slot 5 8 Point Relay Output Module IC670MDL930 Q00017 Q00024
28. B 9302 CM 6 20mm 60m 152m 333m 758m M M17002 CM A Alpha B Belden C Consolidated E Essex M Manhattan O Olflex e Limited to 16 taps at 38 4 Kbaud not known Suitable for applications requiring high flexibility continuous flex or vibration NEC classes are based on data obtained from manufacturers and are subject to change CANADIAN CEC codes are generally similar Other countries may vary The serial bus can be treated as a Class 2 circuit when appropriate wiring practices are followed Maximum available bus lengths may be affected when installation requires the high voltage rated CM Communications rating CM types can replace CL2 but not vice versa Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Serial Bus Waveforms The actual waveforms seen on the cable depend on the cable impedance and the distance from the station presently transmitting A data 0 is a series of three AC pulses while a 1 is no pulse g ey g g ey 1 baud rate SERIAL 1 VOLTAGE RELATIVE TO SERIAL 2 Use caution when connecting instrumentation to the bus A differential probe or a summation of two probes relative to ground is required Inadvertent grounding of one side of the bus can cause loss of data or data errors The pulse frequency is three times the baud frequency for example 460
29. Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F 2 Press F4 entr If you selected Duplex the following screen appears Duplex Default OFF lt gt tgl entr In Duplex Redundancy mode the Bus Interface Unit may receive different output states for given points from the two CPUs If that happens the Bus Interface Unit breaks the tie by outputting the Duplex Default State to those points 3 If you want to go to the next screen without making a change press F2 gt To change the Duplex Default state press F3 tgl 4 Press F4 entr to save the new selection Note If the Bus Interface Unit loses communications with BOTH CPUs individual outputs go to their configured Hold Last State or Output Default State This selection is part of the individual modules configurations GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 13 Select Configuration Protection This feature can be used to protect the station configuration To make subsequent changes protection must be removed again Before the station is used its configuration should be protected CONFIG PROTECT Disable lt gt tgl entr 1 If the selection shown on line 3 should be changed press F3 tgl Press F4 entr 2 This is the last Genius Bus Interface Unit configuration screen Tag Name Screen Display only Tag Name lt gt tgl entr Review or Continue Configuration If you want to review or
30. Duplex 11 reserved Duplex Default Configuration Protection read only Serial Bus Address read only Baud Rate Code read only 0 153 6Kb ext 1 153 6 Kb std 2 76 8 Kb 3 38 4 Kb Fault Reporting Disabled 0 yes 1 no unlabelled bits not used BSM Switch Time 0 2 5 sec 1 10 sec reserved Series Six Series Five Reference Address Read Only Configuration Length unused bytes in Write Configuration Sequence Diagnostic Length bytes read only unused reserved Sync Module Present slot 1 bit 0 slot 8 bit 7 Group Move 1 The diagram below shows the sequence of group mode configuration data for Group Move 1 Move 1 and Move 2 The format for subsequent moves is the same Group Move 1 Byte 28 716 5 4 3 2 1 0 Source Slot Byte 29 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Destination Slot Byte 30 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Which Sweeps Data Group Will Be Moved Byte 31 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Hold Last State Defailt Submove t Byte 32 716 5 4 3 2 1 0 Source Table Segment Selector Byte 93 71 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Destination Table Segment Selector Byte 34 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 Source Offset in bytes LSB Byte 35 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Source Offset in bytes MSB 6 6 5 5 4 4 Byte 36 7 Byte 37 7 3 2 1 0 Destination Offset in bytes LSB 3 2 1 40 Destination Offset in bytes MSB Bytes8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Length of
31. If the low and high engineering units values are equal the output of the channel is E the minimum output level OmV if the AQ data is less than the low engineering units value E the maximum output level approximately 10 5V span value if the AQ data is greater than or equal to the low engineering units value The low span value is displayed next This is the actual voltage in microvolts that a channel will output when the low engineering units value is commanded Span values are changed in the same way that engineering units values are changed Valid span values are 10 000 to 10 000 or 0 to 10 000 In the 0 to 10V range a negative value for low span can not be configured S 1 CH1 SPAN L 10000 lt gt chg entr 5 88 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F The high span value for the channel is displayed next S 1 CH1 SPAN H 10000 lt gt chg entr If the low and high span values are configured to be equal the channel will output the same voltage for all engineering units AQ values The output voltage will correspond to that low high span value For example if both the low span and high span values were configured as 10 000 the output voltage for the channel would be 10V regardless of the AQ value The high span value must be greater than or equal to the low span value If you enter a high or low span value that violates this condition you will not
32. L Terminal Block Do not tilt the Bus Interface Unit to remove it Attempting to remove the Bus Interface Unit at an angle may damage the equipment 3 14 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Removing Replacing the Bus Interface Unit Fuse If all the Bus Interface Unit LEDs go off it may be necessary to replace its fuse The fuse can be removed without disturbing any other parts of the station or wiring 1 To check the fuse remove power from the station Avoid touching the exposed wiring on the Terminal Block when removing the Bus Interface Unit Caution Electrostatic discharge can damage the module when it is not installed on a Terminal Block Always observe normal ESD protection practices when handling an un installed module Use of a ground cuff and a grounded floor surface are recommended 2 Fully loosen the retaining screws in the Bus Interface Unit and carefully remove it from the Terminal Block Do not tilt the module during removal 3 Remove the retaining screws from the BIU 4 The fuse location is shown below Visually inspect the fuse to see whether it has blown 46464 Fuse 5 To remove the fuse from the holder carefully pry it upward Take care not to damage any components in the module Place the new fuse in position and press it into the holder The fuse shoul
33. The following scaling values would be used Low engineering units High engineering units Low internal units High internal units 2000 1800 1500 9000 hundredths ft sec hundredths ft sec millivolts millivolts An input value of 5 0 volts would be scaled to an engineering value of 7333 hundredths ft sec GFK 0825F Appendix A Scaling Analog Channels A 5 Appendix Installing Additional Suppression B This appendix describes some precautions that can be taken in an installation to help assure proper operation It is possible some installations might exceed the surge immunity capabilities specified in chapter 1 This is most likely in outdoor installations or where the power source is from another building or ground system It is prudent to provide local transient protection Note MOVs do a good job of absorbing transients on communications control and power lines provided the total energy of those transients does not exceed the rating of the device However if the energy of the transient exceeds the rating of the device the MOV may be either damaged or destroyed This failure may not be visibly or electrically evident MOVs should be regularly inspected for signs of damage to assure continued protection against transients For some applications periodic replacement of critical MOVs is recommended even if they do not show signs of damage Suppression at the Power Lines Protection can be provided by connec
34. Y y Send outputs from BIU to Synchronization modules y Move all inputs within BIU network map from BIU tables to the Genius communications buffers y Move all outputs within BIU network map from the Genius communications buffers to the BIU intemal tables BIU Waits if MFP is busy y Read all reference input parameters from a Synchronization module Y Read all group data to the BIU from a Synchronization module Y Send all outputs to conventional modules y Send all reference parameter outputs to smart modules but not to a Synchronization module y Send all group data to all smart modules except a Synchronizarion module Background Tasks Chapter 4 Operation MFP receives data from the BIU and places the data in its input tables y MFP BUSY MFP places received data into its configured memory locations MFP solves its program logic utilizing newly received data MFP updates its configured memory locations Y FP Waits y MFP provides data from its output tables to the BIU FP Waits Y MFP provides group data to the BIU The tasks shown in shaded boxes are performed only if the I O Station includes a Synchronization module The Synchronization module is usually a Micro Fleld Processor Group Data is moved only during its configur
35. alpha 50 CU 427 50 Ohm Copper 500 OHM Select UNITS of 1 10 Ohms 003902 alpha 00427 100 PT 392 100 Ohm Platinum 100 CU 427 100 Ohm Copper 3000 OHM Select UNITS of 1 10 Ohms alpha 00392 IPTS 6 8 alpha 00427 100PT 3923 98 13 Ohm Platinum alpha 100 NI 100 Ohm Nickel 003923 IPTS 68 Wire Type Next specify the type of field wiring present at the terminal board connectors for each RTD The choices are 3 WIRE and 4 WIRE S 1 CH1 WIRE TYP 3 WIRE lt gt tgl entr 1 Use the F3 toggle key if you want to change the displayed RTD Wire type 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 69 Low Alarm Limit Next set the low alarm limit for the RTD The range is 32 767 to 32 767 Each RTD channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit Alarms do not stop the process or change the value of the input Alarm limits can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal If alarm reporting is not wanted alarm limits can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be activated The units used for alarm limits are the same type entered on the Units screen tenths of Ohms or tenths of degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit If units are subsequently changed alarm limits should be reviewed and adjusted if necessary S 1 CH1 ALARM LO 200 lt gt chg entr 1 Use the F
36. entr The Destination can be the same module specified as the Source Press the F4 enter key to accept the destination slot then press F2 gt to go to the next configuration screen 5 104 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure the First Move for a Group Group Move T 1 Src Ref AI00009 lt gt tgl entr For each data type a starting offset and length can be specified It is not necessary to move all of a module s data of a particular type You can specify any suitable offset and length If the reference is to a BIU table you must enter the actual address of the data The BIU will calculate the offset For a Micro Field Processor the following data types can be read or written R AI AQ A I Q M T G In addition data of types S SA SB and SC can be moved from the MFP to BIU only The BIU has read access only to these tables Press the F4 enter key to accept the Source Reference Press F2 gt to go to the next configuration screen Next enter the Destination Reference Group Move bod Des Ref R00002 lt gt tgl entr Press the F4 enter key to accept the Destination Reference Press F2 gt to go to the next configuration screen Enter the length for the data to be moved Group Move IT Byte Len 032 lt gt entr Configure More Moves for a Group Continue from the screen shown a
37. gt to go to the next screen 5 36 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Channel Fault Reporting The Bus Interface Unit can report faults for each channel to the network controller If fault reporting is enabled for a channel the Bus Interface Unit sends a message to the network controller if any fault occurs on that channel If fault reporting is disabled the Bus Interface Unit does not send fault reports for the channel to the network controller Regardless of whether fault reporting is enabled the Bus Interface Unit detects faults on the circuit and takes appropriate action If a fault occurs the fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the I O module Number of the channel S1 Faults Ch 01 at the cursor location Selections for all 4 NNYY channels re lt gt tgl entr 1 Use the F3 tgl key to select Y or N for each channel Select Y if the Bus Interface Unit should report module faults to the network controller for that channel Select N if it should not 2 Use the F1 lt and F2 gt keys to select move the cursor selects channels 3 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections on this screen 4 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Channel Active GFK 0825F When a channel is configured as Active it is scanned for data and checked for errors If a channel should not be scanned that channel can be configured as inactive An
38. starting reference address screen appears The BIU automatically supplies the next available address for the selected data type You can press F4 enter to accept the default value or enter a new value from the keypad Press the F4 enter key after entering a new offset S 1 I I 024 Ref Addr 00481 lt gt clr entr Module reference addresses for each data type must be greater than or equal to the starting addresses listed in the BIU map If you enter an invalid address the HHM prompts BAD REF ADDRESS Use the F2 gt key to display the screen for the module s analog output data Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F S 1 AQ AQ 008 AQ00025 00032 lt gt chg entr You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 enter key The asterisk beside the data type disappears to show that the current values have been saved Valid values for analog output data length are 0 8 If this length is set to less than 8 and the module has not been previously configured the outputs of unused channels will go to OmV However if the module has been configured previously and is reconfigured to use fewer channels the channels that are removed will continue to output voltage at their previously configured levels until the module is reset S 1 AQ AQ 008 AQ00025 00032 lt gt chg entr Pressing F2 gt moves you to the screen that shows th
39. startup surge current is 20A maximum peak Allow margins 10 to 20 for variations 2 4 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Bus Interface Unit Power Dissipation The Bus Interface Unit power dissipation can be determined once the backplane current supplied to the I O modules is known The following equation can be used to calculate BIU power dissipation BIU Power Dissipation Input Power total backplane current x 6 5 volts For example A Total backplane current 0 5 Amps B Typical Input power 7 7 Watts Therefore BIU Power Dissipation 7 7 W 0 5 x 6 5 4 45 Watts GFK 0825F Chapter 2 Description 2 5 2 6 Load Requirements for Hardware Components The table below shows the DC load required by each module and hardware component All ratings are in milliamps Input and Output module current ratings are with all inputs or outputs on These are maximum requirements not typical Catalog Number Description Current mAmps C670MDD441 ixed I O Module 24 VDC 10 Inputs 6 Outputs 110 C670MDL233 nput Module 120 VAC 8 Isolated Points 40 C670MDL240 nput Module 120 VAC 16 Grouped Points 71 C670MDL241 nput Module 16 Points 2 groups 240 VAC 77 C670MDL640 nput Module 24 VDC 16 Grouped Pos Neg Points 83 C670MDL641 nput Module 48 VDC 16 Grouped Pos
40. tgl entr When the network scan is disabled all inputs hold last state For previously configured modules outputs mapped to the network will either default or hold their last state or value as configured 1 If you want to change the present selection press F3 tgl 2 Press F4 entr If you want to go to the next screen without changing the selection press F2 gt Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 15 Configure the Network Map for the Bus Interface Unit The next screens are used to assign the starting addresses and lengths for the Bus Interface Unit s network map This is the data exchanged on the Genius bus Blk Map Start I Indicates no data type has been selected yet lt gt entr discrete inputs bits discrete outputs bits analog inputs 16 bit words Q analog outputs 16 bit words PPro If the system host is a Series 90 PLC the lengths must correspond to the memory assignments made for the Bus Interface Unit during PLC configuration The starting data addresses configured for the BIU network map and the I O modules in the station usually match the references configured for the PLC but that is not required If the network controller is a Series Six or Series Five PLC only the length selected here is used the entry made on the starting address screen is not relevant to PLC For those PLC types the starting address was assigned on an earlier screen The following table sho
41. the BIU has 256 bytes of memory available for each of the four types of data discrete and analog inputs and outputs I Q AI and AQ For each data type up to half 128 of the 256 bytes can be used for the data that will be exchanged on the Genius bus During BIU configuration starting addresses and lengths are set up for each of the BIU s four types of I O memory These addresses and lengths define the BIU s network I O map The data from each table A AI Q and AQ must be contiguous BIU Memory Type Amount Available in BIU Maximum Length for Designation Network Map l 256 bytes up to 1024 contiguous bits Q 256 bytes up to 1024 contiguous bits Al 256 bytes up to 64 contiguous words AQ 256 bytes up to 64 contiguous words Note that although it is possible to configure up to 128 bytes of memory in the network map for each data type the maximum amount that can be included in the map is a total of 128 bytes of inputs I plus ATI and 128 bytes of outputs Q plus AQ Data to be exchanged on the bus must be configured to use references within the network map configured for the BIU Data of individual I O modules may be configured anywhere within available memory It is possible to have inputs or outputs within the I O station that are not exchanged on the Genius bus that is data that is completely local to the I O station For example the I O station might include a Micro Field Processor performing local data processing Communi
42. 04 milliseconds If the line frequency is configured at 50 Hz the module scans each input channel every 1 25 mS S 4 LINE FREQ 60 HZ lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 43 5 44 Circuit Configuration The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the module the Hand held Monitor and the BIU Channel Header For module IC670ALG240 version 1 3 or later if the BIU and Hand held Monitor support display of channel headers a header screen appears for each channel as shown below S 1 CH 1 CONFIG lt gt zoom A Press F2 gt from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel Pressing F2 gt from channel 8 displays the module s first reference parameter screen B Press F1 lt from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel Pressing F1 lt from channel displays the module s last reference parameter screen Press F4 zoom to go to the first configuration screen for the channel When in a channel specific configuration screen press the up arrow MENU key to go to that channel s header screen If the BIU and Hand held Monitor do not support display of channel headers the header screens do not appear and keys F1 lt an
43. 1 Used if conversion type bytes a f f 46 47 is degrees C or F This value should be in 42 43 Open circuit checking suppression for input 1 0 the same units The module multiplies the value by perform check 1 suppress check 100 before using it Range is 100 00 to 100 00 degrees 44 45 Channel active for input 1 0 inactive 1 active 62 79 Ch 2 parameters 46 47 Conversion type for input 1 80 97 Ch 3 parameters 0 1 100 millivolts 1 linearized temperature in 1 10 degrees C 98 115 Ch 4 parameters 2 linearized temperature in 1 10 degrees F 116 133 Ch5 parameters 3 percent of span fractional format 134 151 Ch6 parameters 152 169 Ch7 parameters 170 187 Ch 8 parameters Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 24 Additional Configuration Data for a Current Source Analog Output Module The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 119 for a Current Source Analog Output module IC670ALG330 is listed below Byte Description Byte Description 14 Number of input reference parameters 1 40 41 Ch1 Range 0 no preselected range 15 Number of output reference parameters 2 1 span 4000 to 20000 units 4 000 to 20 000 16 17 Byte length of diagnostic discrete input data 2 span 4000 to 20000 units 0 to 32000 0 4 3 span 0 to 20000 units 0 to 32000 E 7 If the range is not 0 the span and engineering 18 19 Memory type for the module s diagnostic input
44. 10 000 0 to 10 000 The illustration below shows the default relationship between span values and digital to analog counts Digital to Analog Converter Output Values ee eee een 16383 15170 P mss Maximum Output 10 8V 12000 7 8191 Range OV to 10V Range 10V to 10V Minimum Output EAIN ee alena 10000 0 10000 Commanded Value in Engineering Units in Millivolts Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 87 Custom Scaling To scale a channel choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value span and a corresponding engineering units value for each point During operation the module will use these values to convert engineering units into digital values that represent output voltage Engineering units values are 16 bit signed integers from 32 768 to 32 767 Span values are signed integers ranging from 10 000 to 10 000 or 0 to 10 000 The first scaling screen shows the engineering units AQ value that corresponds the low span output value Valid engineering units are 32768 to 32767 S 1 CH1 ENG L 10000 lt gt chg entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 chg 2 Enter the new value using the numeric keypad 3 Press F4 entr to enter the new value or F3 clr to abort the change The high engineering units value for the channel is displayed next S 1 CH1 ENG H 10000 lt gt chg entr
45. 11 on Genius bus 4 9 Communications buffer 4 6 Compatibility among devices 1 9 Configuration creating 5 4 datagram format delete module 5 21 modules 5 15 preventing permitting changes 5 14 selectable features 1 6 Configuration Mismatch fault 5 2 Control wiring 3 3 C 1 CPU Redundanc configuring 5 12 CRC checking C 11 Current voltage range configuring for analog input module configuring for analog output module 5 38 D Data defaults ea Grouped Input module 5 501 5 58 5 93 Analog Voltage Output module Micro Field Processor nodale e 4l RTD module 5 66 Thermocouple input module 5 74 Data types for BIU 4 3 Datagrams for the BIU Analog Module Recalibration 8 30 list of 8 2 Read Configuration asa 8 8 Read Configuration Reply Read I O Forces Read I O Forces Reply 8 32 Read Map 3 3 Read Map Reply 8 3 Read Slot Diagnostics 8 33 Read Slot Diagnostics Reply 8 33 Report Fault datagram format Write Configuration 8 8 Write Map 8 4 Default Hold Last State Analog input module 5 34 Analog output module Discrete input module discrete output module 5 25 Dimensions of BIU DIN rail Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 installing Terminal Block 3 7 mounting removing Terminal Block 3 7 Discrete Input Module 0 references 5 22 configuration format for datagram configuration st
46. 17 7777 2315 55 Platinel II 0 0000 52 25 0 00 1300 00 Range Type If None was configured for Thermocouple Type specify the range for millivolt inputs The number displayed represents a span of millivolts For example 19 5 represents 19 53 millivolts The choices are unused 19 5mV 39mV 78 125mV 156 25mV 312 5mV and 625mV The default is 625 S 1 CH1 RANGE TP 625 lt gt tgl entr 1 Use the F3 toggle key if you want to change the displayed thermocouple range 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selection and go on to the next item Note If you selected Engineering Units of millivolts be sure to configure alarm limits see next page within the Range selected here Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 77 Low Alarm Limit Next set the low alarm limit for the input The range is 32 767 to 32 767 Each thermocouple channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit If an input reaches one of its limits the module reports the actual value and a LOW ALARM or HIGH ALARM message The message identifies the circuit in alarm Only one message is sent upon reaching the limit Alarms do not stop the process or change the value of the input Alarm limits can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal If alarm reporting is not wanted alarm limits can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be activated The units used for alarm limits are the same type entered on the U
47. 2 Optional Place the module in warmup mode by sending the warmup command from the host 3 Send the calibration command from the host The calibration command specifies the channel to calibrate and the current being supplied to the channel s input There is a calibrate command for a high point and one for a low point 4 The module samples the channel and calculates the nominal value using the default calibration data The module reads the number of samples specified in the command 1 to 65535 and calculates the average It then stores the current value and the sample average and recalculates the scaling constants for the channel 5 The module returns status information about the recalibration to the BIU Message Content for Storing New Calibration to Field Area Byte Value Description 7 0 Reserved 8 0 Reserved 9 3 Code to store to field area 10 20 0 Reserved Message Content for Reverting to Factory Calibration Byte Value Description 7 0 Reserved 8 0 Reserved 9 4 Code to revert to factory calibration 10 20 0 Reserved Message Content for Putting Module in Warmup Mode Byte Value Description 7 0 Reserved 8 0 Reserved 9 5 Code to put module in warmup mode 10 20 0 Reserved GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 31 Read I O Forces Subfunction Code 40 hex This datagram can be used to set read force information from a Genius Bus
48. 20000 peel High Point i 16000 12000 Overrange 8000 AUO a Low Point 0 H 4000 20000 24000 Input Current in MicroAmps Span 25000 The first scaling screen shows the engineering units value that is considered equivalent to the low span actual value Engineering units may be from 32768 to 32767 S 4 CH1 EU L 00000 lt gt chg entr 5 46 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Enter the high span value for the channel This is the actual current in microAmps to be scaled to the high engineering units value S 4 CH1 EU H 32000 lt gt chg entr Next enter the actual current in microAmps to be scaled to the low engineering units value S 4 CH1 SPAN L 04000 lt gt chg entr Span values are 16 unsigned integers ranging from 0 to 25 000 After entering the low span value for the input press the F4 enter key Enter a high span value for the same input S 4 CH1 SPAN H 20000 lt gt chg entr Alarm Limits The next screen is used to set the low alarm limit for the channel in engineering units S 4 CH1 AL L 00000 lt gt chg entr Each input channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit Alarm limits can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal The range for each is 32 768 to 32 767 The high alarm limit must be greater
49. 32767 the following numbers 16 table 18 Q table 10 Al table 12 AQ table 20 21 Relative offset from start of table 48 49 Ch1 Low Alarm 22 23 Byte length of discrete diagnostic input 50 51 Ch1 High Alarm data default is 9 24 25 Memory type for the module s 52 65 Ch 2 parameters diagnostic input bits usually type Enter one of the numbers listed above 26 27 Relative offset from start of table 66 79 Ch 3 parameters 28 29 Byte length of module s control output 80 93 Ch 4 parameters bits default is 2 30 31 Memory type for the module s control 94 107 Ch 5 parameters output bits usually type Q Enter one of the numbers listed above 32 33 Relative offset from start of table 108 121 Ch 6 parameters 34 bit 4 Line Frequency 0 50Hz 1 60Hz 122 135 Ch 7 parameters 34 bits 0 1 Filtering Method 0 None 1 10mS 2 136 149 Ch 8 parameters 20mS 35 reserved 150 163 Ch 9 parameters 36 37 Active Channel Bit Map 1 bit per 164 177 Ch 10 parameters channel 38 39 Ch1 Range 178 191 Ch 11 parameters 1 span 10000mV to 10000mV 192 205 Ch 12 parameters 2 span OmV to 10000mV 206 219 Ch 13 parameters 220 233 Ch 14 parameters 234 247 Ch 15 parameters 248 261 Ch 16 parameters GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 22 Additional Configuration Data for an RTD Input Module The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 97 for an RTD Input module IC670ALG620 is listed below
50. 4 Operation Chapter 4 explains how a Bus Interface Unit interacts with the modules in its station how it stores data and how it exchanges data with a PLC or other type of system host Chapter 5 Station Configuration Chapter 5 explains how to configure a Bus Interface Unit and the modules in a station using a Hand held Monitor Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Fault Clearing Chapter 6 describes the diagnostics capabilities of the Bus Interface Unit and explains how faults are cleared Chapter 7 Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data Chapter 7 explains how to monitor or control Field Control I O data using Genius Hand held Monitor or a programmer Chapter 8 Datagrams Chapter 8 lists datagrams that can be sent to a Bus Interface Unit and shows the datagram formats for Field Control modules Appendix A Scaling Analog Channels Appendix A explains how to select scaling values when configuring an analog input or output Configuration instructions are in chapter 5 Appendix B Installing Additional Suppression Appendix B describes some precautions that can be taken in an installation to help assure proper operation Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus This appendix describes the selection and operating characteristics of the bus cable that links Genius devices Appendix D Configuration Examples This appendix includes examples of different Field Control I O Station configurations GFK 0825F iii Preface Related Publications
51. 4 3 Group Data for Intelligent Modules lees eeeseeecceesseecesneeeeeessaeeecesseeeseaeeesesnaeeeeens 4 4 Phe BIW SS Weep iia ccee fected eee be eater eee eT aE AAS 4 5 BIU Backplane Scan Time eee seccceeessseeeeessnceecessseeecsessaeeesessaeeecessaaeesessaeeseeeaeees 4 7 Data Transfer Between the BIU and the Host ieee ceccccccceeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeseeeennneeeeeees 4 9 Data in the BIU s Network Bus Map ccccccccsessessneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeennnaeeeeeeeeseeennnaeeeeeees 4 9 Communications on the Genius BUS ecceeecceeccceeeeeeesnnaeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeseeenaaeeeeeees 4 9 Input Data Sent by the Bus Interface Unit 0 0 ceesseeeceesneeeceesneeeseeesseeeseenaes 4 10 Outputs from the Host to the BIW ee eesseeceeesneeesesseeeecesnaeeecessaaeesessaeeeeesaaeees 4 11 Genius BUS Scan Time 2 c c tctetatetecetitatatatatstacasesasabasatasacadelesababacesacatelasasabasetaceeidaseate 4 12 Operation of the BIU with a Micro Field Processor eeesscceessseeeeeesseceeeesseeeeeenaeees 4 14 MFP and BIU Synchromization ciscvssteccececcaeevtedeecdececedpevtnbecscsetespeusnbecscseteapevtebesesedeces 4 14 MEP A ORGferences s sssccstt ne MEUM RMU MME MU eee ale eel ee ale alte 4 14 MFP Operating Modes n nE EE EEEE EEE E EE TE 4 14 Overview of Synchronous Operation eeeeseessesseesesrresssreesssrtrerssrrerssrreessrreesssreesssreess 4 16 Backing Up Micro Field Processor Outputs 0 eeesesscccessseceeeesseeeeees
52. 8 KHz at 153 6 Kb The peak transmitted voltage Vp and the receiver thresholds Vr are per the electrical specification above The peak voltages measured will decline with distance along the cable from the transmitting station so different stations will have varying amplitudes The wave shape will also become more rounded with distance The minimum amplitude pulses seen during a 0 should exceed the receiver threshold Vr of 900 millivolts by 50 about 1 4 volts for best reliability An occasional pulse at or below the threshold may still not cause the bit to be missed due to a voting algorithm in the logic however Likewise no pulses greater than Vr should exist during logic 1 intervals Occasional extra pulses during this interval are also rejected by the logic Line reflections will show up as notch distortion during the pulse or low level pulses during 1 intervals and their appearance is synchronized to the baud frequency These cause no problem if they do not cause violation of the amplitude criteria of the previous paragraphs The Serial 1 and Serial 2 lines should always have a termination resistor equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable connected at each extreme end When testing a Genius block or other device using a Hand Held Monitor when no serial bus is present a terminating resistor will improve integrity 75 Ohms is recommended GFK 0825F Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus C 5 C 6 Using Other C
53. AQ value that corresponds to the low span output value Valid engineering units are 32768 to 32767 S 1 CH1 ENG L 04000 lt gt chg entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 chg 2 Enter the new value using the numeric keypad 3 Press F4 entr to enter the new value or F3 clr to abort the change The high engineering units value for the channel is displayed next S 1 CH1 ENG H 20000 lt gt chg entr If the low and high engineering units values are equal the output of the channel is E the minimum output level OmA if the AQ data is less than the low engineering units value E the maximum output level approximately 20mA span value if the AQ data is greater than or equal to the low engineering units value Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 97 5 98 The low span value is displayed next This is the actual current in microAmps that a channel will output when the low engineering units value is commanded Span values are changed in the same way that engineering units values are changed Valid span values are 0 to 20 000 S 1 CH1 SPAN L 04000 lt gt chg entr The high span value for the channel is displayed next S 1 CH1 SPAN H 20000 lt gt chg entr If the low and high span values are configured to be equal the channel will output the same current for all engineering units AQ values The output current will correspond to that
54. Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Locations for Field Control GFK 0825F Field Control terminal blocks must be installed on a 35mm x 7 5mm DIN rail Modules can be located on equipment in junction boxes inside panels behind operator stations in NEMA enclosures as little as 4 deep and in other locations where space is limited The area should be clean and free of airborne contaminants with adequate cooling airflow Modules can be mounted in any orientation without derating the temperature specification They can be installed in a linear stack as shown on the left in the following illustration using the short connection cables provided with each I O Terminal Block An optional 21 inch 0 53 meter cable IC670CBL002 is also available Only one 21 cable can be used per Field Control station All of the I O Terminal Blocks in a group must be connected either at the top or the bottom of the Bus Interface Unit BIU in the illustration A Bus Interface Unit may not be connected between T O Terminal Blocks o ros 46405 BIU S j BIU o i gt IS a elp Sa Is
55. Data Format Specify the actual slot number and a length of 126 The reference address is the location in the BIU s I Q AI or AQ memory that is used by the module s data Specify only one address typically in the analog input AI table Set the other address selection bytes to all zeros For current module bytes 0 to 3 must be 32 hex 0 0 0 For voltage module bytes 0 to 3 must be 34 hex 0 0 0 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 2 1 0 6 2 1 0 1 6 1 JO 1 6 1 0 7 1 7 1 7 e s 4 fs e 1 o LSB Reference Address or all zeros MSB LSB Q Reference Address or all zeros MSB LSB Al Reference Address or all zeros MSB LSB MSB AQ Reference Address or all zeros 7 Je ls Ja fs 2 h fo unlabelled bits must be 0 Input Default or Hold Last Value 0 default 1 hold last value reserved Bytes 14 28 42 56 70 84 98 112 see below 7 Je s j s l2 h Jo unlabelled bits must be 0 Fault Reporting 0 enabled 1 disabled Channel Active 0 active 1 inactive Range 00 0mA to 20mA 01 4mA to 20mA 10 OV to 10V 11 10V to 10V 8 14 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Bytes 14 125 Channel Configuration Byte Byte Description Byte Byte Description 14 Input 1 ci
56. F Storage temperatures are 40 deg C 40 deg F to 85 deg C 185 deg F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing For information about installing Field Control modules please see Chapter 2 of this manual It describes installation and wiring for the Bus Interface Unit module and terminal block Chapter 2 of the Field Control I O Modules User s Manual It summarizes installation instructions for modules and terminal blocks The individual module datasheets included in the Field Control I O Modules User s Manual which provide specific module wiring information Chapter 2 of the Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual which includes detailed instructions for selecting and installing a Genius bus GFK 0825F Chapter I Introduction 1 5 Configuration for Field Control Configuration is an important part of the process of setting up a Field Control station It establishes the following features E For the Bus Interface Unit Genius serial bus address Baud rate for Genius bus communications Fault reporting to the host Use of the Bus Interface Unit as a bus switching device in a dual redundant bus system Redundancy mode for CPU redundancy OOaqaqgca oO Configuration protection m For I O Modules TO addressing Whether faults will be reported to the host Hold Last State for inputs or outputs Output defaults Range selection for analog modules Scaling for analog modules OOoaod000 O0 Alarm limits fo
57. Field Processor For Additional Information Also See The Hand held Monitor datasheet for basic operating instructions The programming setup instructions for the system host The instructions in this chapter are for local configuration of the BIU and the modules in the I O station The system host must also be configured appropriately to exchange information with the BIU If the host is a Series 90 70 PLC with Logicmaster 90 software release 5 0 or earlier the Genius Bus Interface Unit must be configured as a Generic I O device GFK 0825F 5 1 Configuring the Serial Bus Address and Baud Rate Before a Bus Interface Unit can communicate on the Genius bus its serial bus address must be configured That means if you install a Bus Interface Unit and power it up BEFORE configuring its serial bus address it does not communicate on the bus When you subsequently configure the serial bus address the Bus Interface Unit begins communicating on the bus immediately The baud rate must be set first in order to configure the BIU online See the instructions for setting on the Hand held Monitor on the next page Special Instructions for Series 90 70 PLC Systems Assigning the serial bus address is the first configuration step prior to assignment of the network map for the Bus Interface Unit So when the Bus Interface Unit starts communicating its network map has not yet been assigned That causes the Series 90 70 PLC to generate CONFIGURATION MISM
58. GFK 0825F Additional Configuration Data for an Analog Voltage Output Module The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 119 for an Analog Voltage Output module IC670ALG310 is listed below Byte Description Byte Description 14 Number of input reference parameters 1 40 41 Ch1 Range 0 span 10 000 to 10 000 15 Number of output reference parameters 2 ve 10 000 to 10 000 16 17 Byte length of diagnostic discrete input data 1 span 0 to 10 000 0 3 units 0 to 10 000 18 19 Memory type for the module s diagnostic input bits usually type Enter one of the following 42 43 Ch1 Low Eng Units 32768 to 32767 numbers 16 table 18 Q table 10 Al table 12 AQ table 20 21 Relative offset from start of table 44 45 Ch 1 High Eng Units 32768 to 32767 22 23 Byte length of the module s analog output data 46 47 Ch1 Low Span 10 000 to 10 000 0 16 lt high 24 25 Memory type for the module s analog output 48 49 Ch1 High Span data usually type AQ Enter one of the numbers 10 000 to 10 000 gt low listed above 26 27 Relative offset from start of table 50 59 Ch 2 parameters 28 29 Byte length of module s control output bits 60 69 Ch3 parameters 0 2 30 31 Memory type for the module s contro output 70 79 Ch4 parameters bits usually type Q Enter one of the numbers listed above 32 33 Relative offset from start of table 80 89 Ch 5 parameters
59. Interface Unit The information read is determined by the value specified in the datagram Byte Description 0 Force Table Requested 0 input enable 1 output enable 2 input values 3 output values e To read which inputs are forced specify the number 0 in the datagram e To read which outputs are forced specify 1 in the datagram To read forced input values specify 2 in the datagram e To read forced output values specify 3 in the datagram In the BIU two force enable tables show which points are forced Two force values tables show the forced values Each table contains a byte of data for each byte of discrete data followed by a word of data for each channel of analog data For example if a BIU is configured to have 6 bytes of discrete input data and 6 channels of analog input data the input force enable table and input force value table would look like this Force Enabled Table Force Values Table 1st 8 discrete inputs force enable 1st 8 discrete inputs force values 2nd 8 discrete inputs force enable 2nd 8 discrete inputs force values last 8 discrete inputs force enable last 8 discrete inputs force values 6 7 1st channel analog inputs force enable 6 7 1st channel analog inputs force values 89 2nd channel analog inputs force enable 89 2nd channel analog inputs force values wf On mas ea Mee a o 16 17 6th channel analog inputs force enable 16 17 6th channel analog inputs force value Note
60. Move 1 Destination Location Q0001 Move 1 Data Length 2 bytes Sweep Selections 4 and 12 only D 6 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F A Alarm limits Analog Grouped Input module 5 47 5 55 5 63 Analog input module 5 33 RTD module 5 70 Thermocouple module 5 78 Alignment tabs2 7 Analog Current Output Module configuration instructions 5 81 5 90 Analog Grouped Input Module alarm limits 5 47 channel active 5 45 5 53 5 60 5 95 configuration instructions 5 40 5 48 5 56 data defaults 5 42 5 50 5 58 5 93 I O references input scaling 5 4695 54 5 62 5 97 line frequency 5 43 5 51 5 59 Analog Input Module alarm limits 5 33 Channel Active configuration format for datagram 8 14 configuration steps 5 29 current voltage range 5 31 default hold last state fault reporting scaling values Analog inputs Analog Output Module channel active 5 37 channel fault reporting 5 37 configuration format for datagram 8 16 configuring 5 35 current voltage ranges 5 38 scaling 5 39 Analog e Analog Voltage Output Module channel active data defaults TO references 5 81 scaling range Attenuation Auxiliary I O Terminal Block 1 4 B Backplane current 2 4 Backplane scan times Baud rate configuration 5 8 selection guidelines BIU backing up outputs with MFP BIU data pes 431 BIU
61. See page 2 4 20mS maximum from nominal input voltage Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block Power Requirements Reliability 16mA maximum More than 600 000 hours operation MTBF calculated For power requirements of specific I O modules please see the Field Control I O Modules User s Manual GFK 0826 Chapter 2 Description 2 9 Chapter Installation 3 This chapter describes System Wiring Guidelines System Grounding Locations for Field Control Modules Installing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block on a Panel Installing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block on a DIN Rail Installing the Cables Between Terminal Blocks Power Wiring to the Bus Interface Unit Connecting the Communications Bus Installing Removing the Bus Interface Unit Removing Replacing the Bus Interface Unit Fuse Upgrading the BIU firmware For more information please refer to The Field Control I O Modules User s Manual for information about installing I O modules Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus for a detailed description of the characteristics of the Genius bus GFK 0825F 3 1 Preinstallation Check Carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage during shipping If any part of the system is damaged notify the carrier immediately The damaged shipping container should be saved as evidence for inspection by the carrier As the consignee it is your responsibility to register a
62. Series Five PLC This book describes the installation and operation of the Bus Controller It also contains the programming information needed to interface Genius I O devices to a Series Five PLC Genius I O PCIM User s Manual GFK 0074 Reference manual for the PCIM which interfaces a Genius bus to a suitable host computer This book describes the installation and operation of the PCIM It also contains the programming information needed to interface Genius I O devices to a host computer Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards GFK 1179 Jeanne Grimsby Lead Technical Writer for I O Products Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 GFK 0825F Contents NAME AU COON tstaes aaccbecdshecesesachecusguneceudsanecdesditetenssisscusdetecveacoseatextetecscevaueeseetssees 1 1 OV EL VIEW EE REE EE EUR OUR Ae I ees a 1 1 Field Control Modules snee T beau bebe babes seb bebe b bevel A 1 2 Environmental Specifications setnie eea aa ae a a aaa a ta T aaao 1 5 Configuration for Field Control mosson ieres i ere eoar e aroo Eroe EE EErEE SUENE rene 1 6 Field Control in a Genius System esseseeessreesesreessrrersssreesssrresseriesssrreessrreesssrresseres 1 7 Required Genius and Host System Equipment eeeesseeceessneeeeessneeeceesseeeeeesaeees 1 9 Using Field Control in a CPU Redundancy System eeeeeeeeseeeeeessneeeeeesneeeeeeeaes 1 10 Using Field
63. TO Station with both analog and discrete data where all of the data is configured within the BIU s I O map As in the first example the BIU sends all inputs from Field Control modules on the network All outputs are generated by the system controller which sends them to the BIU over the network An I O station with both discrete and analog data which also includes a Micro Field Processor The Micro Field Processor performs some I O processing locally An I O Station with both discrete and analog data which also includes a Micro Field Processor Group Data Moves are used to transfer data within the I O Station This configuration allows all station inputs to be solved by the Micro Field Processor and all station outputs to be controlled by the Micro Field Processor The system controller for example a PLC will receive all station inputs If the Micro Field Processor stops providing outputs the system controller will assume control of all station outputs Example 1 Discrete Data Network Processing GFK 0825F In this I O Station there are only discrete I O modules All data is included within the I O map that is configured for the Bus Interface Module and exchanged over the network There is no local Micro Field Processor BIU Map 100001 100024 Q00001 Q00024 No synchronization is required Slot 1 12VDC 16 Point Pos Neg Input Module IC670MDL640 100001 100016 Slot 2 120VAC 8 Point Isolated Input Module IC670M
64. Unit on the Program Block ID screen An overview of these menus is shown on the next page This is the HHM s Main Menu for Field Control F1 Monitor F2 Configuration From this menu press F2 Configuration This menu appears F1 Genius Config F2 Module Config More From this menu you can Press F1 to configure the Genius Bus Interface Unit Instructions begin on the next page Press F2 to configure the individual modules in the station Instructions begin on page 5 23 Press F4 to display the next configuration screen F1 Grp Data Move F2 Previous Menu More Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 5 Field Control HHM Menu Overview F1 HHM UTILITIES F2 ANALYZE F3 CONFIGURATION F4 DEVICE MEMORY F2 F3 F1 MONITOR BLOCK F1 PROG BLOCK ID F2 MNTR CNTL REF F2 CONFIG BLOCK F3 BLOCK BUS STS F3 COPY CONFIG F4 PULSE TEST i F4 F1 F2 p F1 Monitor F2 F2 Configuration F2 Field Control Configuration Screens F1 Genius Config F4 more Field Control F2 Module Config F1 Grp Data Move F2 Previous Menu Monitor I O Screens F1 ae eA F Y maf ey eiaa J NNANNNANNAN F3 F1 Monitor I O Device SBA 1O Scan lt e F2 Faults 20 ENABLED f 1 F3 Previous Menu 7 4 Y F2 y Fi Groin Mave 1 0 ea F2 Source Slot 0 Baud Rate N
65. Voltage Output module 5 81 BIU reads from modules 4 5 description for conventional modules for Micro Field Processor 5 99 sent by host 4 11 RTD Input module Overriding I O Thermocouple Input module 5 72 Register memory for S6 or S5 PLC 5 9 7 6 P Report Fault datagram 8 5 RTD Input module Panel mounting 3 5 alarm limits PLC Fault Table channel active 5 68 PLC types 1 7 configuration 5 64 Power data defaults specifications 2 9 VO references wiring line frequenc general information 3 3 resistance 5 71 wiring to BIU Terminal Block 3 9 RTD type 5 69 RTD wire type Power LED 2 2 types of units 5 68 Power Supply l RTD Resistance input power requirements 2 4 configuring 5 71 specifications 2 9 RTD type for RTD module 5 69 timing 2 3 Power wiring C 1 RUN LED 2 2 Preinstallation check Program sweep S of Micro Field Processor 4 14 Propagation delays C 7 Scaling Protocols ea Analog Input module 5 46 5 54 5 62 Scaling Range R Analog Voltage Output module 5 87 Scaling values Rack number 15 20 Analog input module 5 32 Range Index 4 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Analog output module 5 39 Se TE in millivolts or microamps A 1 measuring Scan times Selective sweep 4 4 Serial Bus Address assigning to new BIU 5 4 changing with the HHM configuring 5 2 Series
66. a 16 Point Grouped Analog Input Module 1 ALG240 1 1 Fa S1 Al Al016 Al00001 00016 F4 F2 Si 1 1 088 re ae F4 F2 S1 Q Q016 Q00001 00016 F4 F2 j S1 Module gt l DEFAULT ZERO F2 y F1 S1 Module gt Al DEFAULT ZERO F2 Y F1 S1 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO Foy IF S1 FILTERING 20MS F2 y F S1 LINE FREQ 60 HZ F2 4 A lt S1 LINE FREQ 60 HZ Foy fF S1 CH1 CONFIG F1 F2 select channels F4 ZOOM S1 CH1 ACTIVE e F2 y M 1 CH1 DEF RNG F2 y A F1 S1 CH1 ENGL 04000 F2 y Fi S1 CH1 ENG H F2 4 fF S1 CH1 SPAN L 04000 _ F2 y F1 S1 CH1 SPAN H 20000 F2 y hey S1 CH1 ALL 04000 F2 y FI S1 CH1 ALH 20000 Fo y FA Repeat for other channels F2 5 40 When you select Read from the empty slot HHM screen this module screen appears S 4 ALG240 1 0 lt gt del zoom Assign I O References for the Modul When you zoom into the module s slot a screen like this appears S 4 AI AT 016 Default data length AI01307 01322 Default BIU data type Next available reference lt gt chg entr This screen shows the default table and length and the next available reference address in that table for that reference parameter The length is displayed in units that are appropriate for that data type AI and AQ are in words Q and I are in bits The
67. a change press F2 gt If the selection should be changed press F3 tgl Hot Standby CPU Redundancy A device configured for Hot Standby redundancy receives outputs from both CPUs It is normally controlled by Device Number 31 If no outputs are available from Device Number 31 for a period of three bus scans the outputs are immediately controlled by Device Number 30 If outputs are not available from either Device Number 30 or 31 outputs go to their configured default or hold their last state In Hot Standby redundancy Device Number 31 always has priority so that when Device Number 31 is on line it controls the outputs Duplex CPU Redundancy Only all discrete stations can operate in Duplex redundancy mode In Duplex mode a device receives outputs simultaneously from both Device Number 30 and 31 The device compares the outputs If corresponding outputs are the same the device sets the output to that state If corresponding outputs are not the same the device will set the output to its configured ON or OFF Duplex Default State which must be configured for all outputs in the station If either Device Number 30 or 31 stops sending outputs to a device its outputs are directly controlled by the remaining device If both 30 and 31 stop sending outputs the outputs in the station either default to their programmed default state not the Duplex Default State or hold their last state as configured Field Control Genius
68. areference in station 2 The alternatives at this stage are 1 Change the map of station 2 to free up the needed contiguous I references 2 Change the map of station 1 to start at higher references such as 10097 10160 3 Add a third I O station to accommodate the additional modules It would have been easier to add the module to station 1 if extra references had been configured originally or if some vacancies had been allowed as shown below Station 1 Station 2 10001 10096 10097 10160 AIQU0T AlQU06 AIQO0Y9 Al0016 Q0001 Q0032 Q0033 Q0064 AQ0001 AQ0008 AQ0009 AQ0016 GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 17 You might use a worksheet like the one shown below to record the I O references and Reference Parameters configured for the Bus Interface Unit and for the modules in the I O Station Slot 0 is the location of the BIU The references you enter for the BIU are the ones that will be communicated on the Genius bus Slots 1 through 8 maximum contain conventional I O modules or intelligent modules You will find another worksheet later in this chapter where you can record I O assignments made for Group Data moves for intelligent modules such as the Micro Field Processor Conventional discrete and analog I O modules use just one type of data However intelligent I O modules can use multiple data types Module References and Reference Parameters Worksheet
69. be able to leave the span configuration screens until valid low and high values are configured Pressing the CLEAR key in this situation will cause the HHM to display the following message Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you want to return to the span configuration screens press F4 no If you want to clear the entire slot configuration instead press F3 yes The slot will then be displayed as empty Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 89 Configure an 8 Point Analog Current Output Module 1 ALG330 1 0 enc E S1 I 1 032 100001 00016 F4 F2 y S1 AQ AQ 008 AQ00001 00008 F4 F2 Y S1 Q Q 016 Q00001 00016 F4 F2 y S1 Module gt l DEFAULT ZERO F1 F2 4 S1 Network gt AQ DEFAULT ZERO Foy AF1 S1 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO F2 y AFA S1 LOC DEF OUT ZERO F2y F1 For HHM version 4 8 or above this channel selection menu appears S1 CH1 CONFIG F4 S1 CH1 ACTIVE F2 F1 1 S1 CH1 DEF RNG Foy Art 04000 S1 CH1 ENG L roy F S1 CH1 SPAN H roy AFA Repeat for other channels F2 For HHM version 4 8 or above press F1 from Channel Active screen or Up Menu key to go to Channel Config screen S 1 ALG330 1 0 lt gt del zoom Assign l Assign I O References for the Module When you zoom into the module s slot a screen like this appears Backplane Slot sot l 1 032 Defaul
70. by the shielding Most remaining noise pickup is common mode the transformer provides a high common mode noise rejection by looking only at the differential signal across the SER 1 2 lines The two input comparators detect the positive polarity input pulses separately from the negative these are sent to a custom interface logic chip which digitally filters these for timing and sequence then reconstructs the NRZ digital data Voltages between the two thresholds are ignored This filtering and the high input threshold if the comparators are highly effective in rejecting both random impulse noise and low level line reflections Finally a CRC 6 checksum check is performed before the data is sent to the local processor not shown Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Genius Transceiver Electrical Specification Property Min Max Normal peak voltage Vp into 78 ohm terminated cable 1 3 5 volts 5 5 volts Normal peak voltage Vp into 150 ohm terminated cable 1 6 0 volts 9 5 volts Rated bus impedance 2 78 ohms 150 ohms Maximum output voltage SER 1 and 2 open 3 Peak 35 volts RMS 15 volts Maximum output current SER 1 and 2 shorted together Peak 180 milliamp RMS 50 milliamp Transmitter source resistance 80 ohms 140 ohms Transmitter source inductance transformer leakage inductance 10 microhenries Receiver input threshold Vr Vr 4 0 7 volt 1 1 volt Receive
71. byte 68 124 125 high alarm limit Isb in byte 124 GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 15 Conventional Analog Output Modules Configuration Data Format Specify the actual slot number and a length of 62 The reference address is the location in the BIU s I Q AI or AQ memory that is used by the module s data Specify only one address typically in the analog output AQ table Set the other address selection bytes to all zeros Bytes 0 to 3 must be 33 hex 0 0 0 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 7 6 5 4 S 2 i 0 LSB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSB 6 3 0 LSB 6 3 MSB 7 6 5 4 3 2 i 0 LSB 7 6 5 4 13 2 1 0 MSB 7 3 1 0 LSB 7 6 5 j4 13 1 0 MSB 7 le 5 4 s l2 li lo 7 e 5 4 s l2 li lo Bytes 14 26 38 50 see below 7 le 5 4 3 l2 li lo Reference Address or all zeros Q Reference Address or all zeros AI Reference Address or all zeros AQ Reference Address or all zeros unlabelled bits must be 0 Output Default or Hold Last Value 0 default 1 hold last value reserved must be 0 unlabelled bits must be 0 Fault Reporting 0 enabled 1 disabled Channel Active 0 active 1 inactive Range 00 0mA to 20mA 01 4mA to 20mA 10 0V to 10V 11 10V to 10V 8 16 Field Cont
72. cable in the harness since binding wires tightly together increases the coupling and mechanical stress that can damage the relatively soft insulation of some serial cable types Wiring external to equipment and in cable trays should be separated following NEC practices The pickup over long distance runs with adequate spacing consists of common mode and ground voltage differences These are rejected due to the differential transmission mode of the Genius bus and the bus isolation transformers built into each Genius I O block C 1 C 2 Electrical Interface The Genius serial bus uses computer grade twisted pair data cable The half duplex token sequence used requires only a single pair since at any time only one station is transmitting and all others are receiving All stations must receive in order to track the present token value and take their appropriate turn on the bus regardless whether the data is to be used locally The transmit sequence is the same as the serial bus address SBA set into each location during configuration A simplified interface circuit is shown below Wiring Terminals REF L Osm pii C LOCAL COME S 9 C SUPPLY SHIELD amp 45 to10V OUT S i i eT 2 SER Sie COMP SSER2 t SER2 i TX SHIELD Ss R oad TX T INTERFACE ea o gt ISOLATION Z atin LOGIC chassis GROUND Signal coupling to the bus is via a high frequenc
73. claim with the carrier for damage incurred during shipment However GE Fanuc will fully cooperate with you should such action be necessary After unpacking the Field Control modules and other equipment record all serial numbers Serial numbers are required if you should need to contact Product Service during the warranty period of the equipment All shipping containers and all packing material should be saved should it be necessary to transport or ship any part of the system Static Protection The Bus Interface Unit has CMOS components that are susceptible to static damage Use proper static handling techniques when handling this module Hand held Monitor Connector The connector on the Genius Bus Interface Unit is intended for use with a Genius Hand held Monitor only It must be connected to a nonincendive circuit only ia BE lt HHM must be connected to ee a nonincendive circuit only 3 2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F System Wiring Guidelines Four types of wiring may be encountered in a typical factory installation 1 Power wiring the plant power distribution and high power loads such as high horsepower motors These circuits may be rated from tens to thousands of KVA at 220 VAC or higher 2 Control wiring usually either low voltage DC or 120 VAC of limited energy rating Examples are wiring to start stop switches contactor c
74. configuration of the Micro Field Processor is not affected by Hot Insertion Removal Hot Insertion Removal Not Permitted in Hazardous Locations In hazardous locations I O Station power must be turned off before inserting removing module Failure to observe this precaution may result in personal injury system malfunction and or damage to the equipment Chapter 2 Description 2 7 2 8 Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block The Bus Interface Unit provides terminals for power and ground connections Maximum wire size is AWG 14 avg 2 0690mm2 cross section The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block also has eight input terminals for connection to a single or dual Genius bus These terminals accommodate up to two AWG 14 wires The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block contains bus switching circuitry permitting it to be used as a BSM Controller in a dual bus redundancy system A connecting cable is provided with each I O Terminal Block It is used to connect the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block to the first I O Terminal Block The same type of cable interconnects subsequent I O Terminal Blocks The cable has molded connectors that are keyed to assure proper orientation The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block is designed to be extremely reliable it should not be necessary to replace or rewire it after installation The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block stores the configuration parameters for the station The Bus Interface Unit can be removed witho
75. discrete input diagnostic data S 4 I I 032 I01817 01904 lt gt chg entr You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 enter key After you press the Enter key the asterisk disappears to show that the current values have been saved Next press F2 to go to the screen that shows the module s Q references which are for fault clearing S 4 Q Q 008 0Q01817 01832 lt gt chg entr You can also edit this screen Use the F4 enter key to save the selections Press F2 to continue to the next item The next screen displays AQ references for the module Enter a length of 0 Use the F4 enter key to save and continue S 4 AQ AQ 004 AQ01057 01060 lt gt chg entr All required references for the module must be entered You can give a reference parameter a length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU If you attempt to back out before the references are all configured the HHM displays the following screen Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you exit from this display the references you have configured are not saved Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 65 Assign Data Defaults For data types AI and I you can determine what the BIU should do with the module s data if the BIU loses communications with the module Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero You can accept DEFAULT ZERO with the F4 enter key or press F3 t
76. discrete output Q table Set the other address selection bytes to all zeros Bvtes 0 to 3 must be 51 hex 0 0 0 for all modules except IC670MDL730 Bytes 0 to 3 must be 20 hex 0 0 0 for Electronic Short Circuit Protection Output Module IC670MDL730 Byte 4 7 6 5 14 3 2 1 0 Byte 5 7 6 5 14 3 2 j1 JO Byte 6 7 6 5 j4 3 2 ji JO Byte 7 7 6 5 14 3 2 1 0 Byte 8 7 6 5 14 3 2 1 0 Byte 9 7 6 5 14 3 2 1 J0 Byte 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Byte 11 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Byte z e i fa fs 2 h fo 12 Byte 13 7 le Is J4 fb 2 h Jo LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB Reference Address or all zeros Q Reference Address or all zeros Al Reference Address or all zeros AQ Reference Address or all zeros unlabelled bits must be 0 Output Default or Hold Last State 0 default 1 hold last state Fault Reporting 0 enabled 1 disabled reserved must be 0 Bytes 14 to 29 Circuit Configuration For each circuit content is 7 Je Is Ja fs l2 h fo unlabelled bits must be 0 Output Default State 0 off 1 on Byte Byte Description Byte Byte Description 14 Circuit 1 Configuration 22 Circuit 9 Configuration 15 Circuit 2 Configuration 23 Circuit 10 Configuration 16 Circuit 3 Configuration 24 Circuit 11 Configuration 17 Circui
77. displays the module s first reference parameter screen B Press F1 lt from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel Pressing F1 lt from channel displays the module s last reference parameter screen C Press F4 zoom to go to the first configuration screen for the channel When in a channel specific configuration screen press the up arrow MENU key to go to that channel s header screen If the BIU and Hand held Monitor do not support display of channel headers the header screens do not appear and keys F1 lt and F2 gt are used to scroll through channel specific configuration screens The following features are configured for each channel Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Channel Active When a channel is configured as Active it is scanned for data and checked for errors If a channel should not be scanned that channel can be configured as inactive An inactive input channel returns the value 0 S 2 CH 1 ACTI VE lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Input Range On this screen specify the range for the input There are two predetermined range and data scaling combinations S 2 CH1 RANGE 10V to 10V lt gt tgl entr The default is 10V to 10V Sele
78. does not perform an I O scan that function is performed by the BIU MFP and BIU Synchronization Automatic operation of the Micro Field Processor must be synchronized with that of the BIU Synchronization between the MFP and the BIU occurs at the following points 1 The MFP waits for group data from the BIU 2 The MFP waits for its input reference parameter data see page for a discussion of reference parameter data from the BIU After receiving the reference parameter data from the BIU the MFP solves its logic program 3 After solving its logic program the MFP waits for the BIU to request its output reference parameter data Or if the MFP is still busy the BIU waits for the Micro Field Processor to finish solving its logic 4 The MFP waits for the BIU to request any group data from the MFP The diagram on the next page shows the basic points of synchronization between a BIU and an MFP The Micro Field Processor always performs housekeeping and programmer window functions regardless of the combination of BIU and MFP modes MFP I O References The MFP itself has the following configurable references 1001 to 1512 Q001 to Q512 AI001 to AI128 AQ001 to AQI128 References used by the host may map to these MFP references although that is not necessary Appendix D gives examples of I O reference assignments MFP Operating Modes In the Standard Program Sweep mode the Micro Field Processor executes each sweep as quickly as p
79. each output channel For each channel two sets of values are configured high and low scaled values and the actual high and low digital values they represent Based on these two pairs of values the Bus Interface Unit will be able to scale values for all other output levels See Appendix A for information on finding appropriate scaling values for your application If you don t have scaling values ready you can continue to the next screen now and configure scaling at another time The Bus Interface Unit will use default scaling values of 1 1 if no scaling values are entered Indicates which of the 4 scaling values Ta S1 Scale 1 01 you are currently Scaling or digital value 00000 configuring Number of the lt gt entr channel you are now configuring 1 For EACH channel in turn enter scaling values in this order Low scaling value eng l0 High scaling value eng hi Low digital value int l0 High digital value int hi 2 If you press F2 gt the display goes from value to value in sequence If you press Fl lt the display goes to the first value for the previous channel 3 Use the HHM keypad to enter values To enter a negative value first enter the numbers then press the key 4 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections on this screen Press F2 gt to return to the original slot configuration screen GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 39 Configure
80. filter out corrupted data and perform a 6 bit cyclic redundancy check to reject bad data Corrupted signals due to noise show up as missed data rather than incorrect data The bus continues operating to the maximum extent possible when bus errors are detected random bus errors do not shut down communications Bad data is rejected by the receiving device and excessive errors are reported to the controller Bus errors are indicated by flickering of I O block and bus controller LEDs If excessive bus errors occur the problem should be found and corrected Lightning Transient Suppression Running the bus cable outdoors or between buildings may subject it to lightning transients beyond the 1 500 volt transient rating of the system Installing cable underground reduces the probability of a direct lightning strike However buried cables can pick up hundreds of amperes of current when lightning contacts the ground nearby Therefore it is important to protect the installation by including surge protectors on underground data lines The cable shields should be grounded directly Surge suppressors and spark gaps should be used to limit the voltage that might appear on the signal lines It is recommended to install two only silicon surge suppressors or spark gaps to control transients of 1 to 25 Kilovolts from 100 to 1000 amps or more These devices should be installed close to the entrance of the bus to the outdoors Silicon Surge Suppressors are availabl
81. for shielded twisted pair cable is 7500 feet Some cable types are restricted to shorter bus lengths In turn the bus length determines which baud rate may be selected If the application requires greater bus length fiber optics cable and modems can be used as explained later in this chapter Bus Length and Baud Rate for Busses with Phase A Devices If a bus has any Phase A Genius products catalog numbers IC660CBDnnn IC660CBSnnn IC660CBAnnn IC660HHMS500 or IC660CBB900 901 the bus must use 153 6 Kbaud standard and the maximum bus length is 2000 feet Therefore only the cable lengths listed under 153 6s are permitted 153 6e refers to 153 6 Kbaud extended which is not compatible with 153 6 Kbaud standard Baud Rate Selection A Genius I O or communications bus can operate at one of four baud rates 153 6 Kbaud standard 153 6 Kbaud extended 76 8 Kbaud or 38 4 Kbaud Follow these guidelines when selecting the baud rate for a bus 1 All devices on a bus must operate at the same baud rate other busses in the system may operate at different baud rates 2 If there are any older Genius products on the bus catalog numbers IC660CBDnnn IC660CBSnnn IC660CBAnnn IC660HHMS500 or IC660CBB900 901 the bus must be set up to use 153 6 Kbaud standard 3 If the cable length is between 4500 and 7500 feet you must select 38 4 Kbaud This data rate only supports a maximum of 16 device on the bus 4 If the cable l
82. for that module If the module is configured for output defaulting the BIU attempts to set outputs to their default states This is not always possible depending on the nature of the problem For conventional analog modules the BIU converts data from the selected scaled units and performs range checking before sending the outputs 11 Send Reference Parameters to Intelligent Modules Next the BIU sends reference parameter data from its tables to intelligent modules except a Synchronization module If the BIU is unable to contact a module it generates a fault report 12 Move Group Data to Intelligent Modules The BIU moves group data from intelligent modules or from its own internal memories to any intelligent modules except a Synchronization module that is configured to receive data during that sweep If the move fails a fault is generated Background Tasks After performing all the data transfers described above the BIU performs a sequence of background tasks such as fault processing scanning module IDs and testing memory Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F BIU Backplane Scan Time The backplane scan time for the Genius BIU depends on the type and number of modules present in the Field Control station the scan time of the Genius bus and the number and type of Group Data Move definitions Shorter Genius bus scan times typically impose more overhead on the BIU increasing back
83. header screen for the previous channel Pressing F1 lt from channel displays the module s last reference parameter screen Press F4 zoom to go to the first configuration screen for the channel When in a channel specific configuration screen press the up arrow MENU key to go to that channel s header screen If the BIU and Hand held Monitor do not support display of channel headers the header screens do not appear and keys F1 lt and F2 gt are used to scroll through channel specific configuration screens The following features are configured for each channel Channel Active When a channel is configured as Active it is scanned for data and checked for errors If a channel should not be scanned that channel can be configured as inactive An inactive input channel returns the value 0 S 2 CH 1 ACTIVE lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Input Range On this screen specify the range for the input There are two predetermined range and data scaling combinations S 2 CH1 RANGE 10V to 10V lt gt tgl entr The default is 10V to 10V Selection Input voltage mV Data range 1 10000 to 10000 10000 to 10000 2 0 to 10000 0 to 10000 G
84. i ot 3 1 I i it i i AN i It i ly ty man f 1 poles ie l1 i 7 i i sda 1 Il 1 ot 1 ol 1 it 1 E h L 4 50in raga 11 43cm i oe i aa il i tu 1 Clamp Ii EA i Screw i l ae i 70cm ie i tl d 1 i i i a i l tt il 1 l i i Hel 1 Yy 1 mi SIE 11 1 ty o r 1 i ie y ey ie eee p 4 31in l Lt i i 10 95cm Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Installing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block on the DIN Rail 1 Tilt the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block and position it over the rail as shown below left catching the rail behind the tabs in the terminal block 2 Pivot the terminal block downward until the spring loaded DIN rail latches in the terminal block click into place 1 2 A U as Nin tabs rail 3 Tighten the DIN rail clamp screw see below left Recommended torque is 4 to 6 in Ibs Installing the BIU Removing the BIU Terminal Block Terminal Block g l 7 A l g 8 g d 2 I 38 o m g amp 99 8 38 33 Be g i g g 3 Tighten 88 88 amp Loosen 8 88 Upper 2 atc a amp e
85. inactive input channel provides no faults and uses no data R Number of the channel S1 Active Ch 01 at the cursor location NYYN lt gt tgl entr 1 For each channel select Y if the channel should be active Select N if it should not 2 Use the Fl lt and F2 gt keys to select channels 3 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections on this screen 4 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 37 Output Current Ranges Select the current range for each channel to correspond to the signal level of the output device 0 to 20mA for current modules 4 to 20 mA 7 Number of the S1 Range Ch 01 channel you are Oma 20mA now configuring lt gt tgl entr 1 Use the F3 tgl key to select a current voltage range 2 Use the Fl lt and F2 gt keys to select channels 3 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections on this screen 4 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Note Range Selection is a setup parameter it is not ordinarily changed while the module is operating 5 38 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Output Scaling While the actual values received from the application program may represent various types of engineering units the Bus Interface Unit reports values from decimal 0 to 4095 to an analog output module The BIU converts the application data using scaling values configured for
86. next available address in the selected table You can press F4 enter to accept this value or F3 clear then enter a new value from the keypad Press the F4 enter key after entering a new offset S 2 AI AI 008 Ref Addr 00114 lt gt clr entr The 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module is an intelligent module which uses more than one type of data Use the F2 gt key to display the screen for the module s discrete input diagnostic data S 2 I I 040 101152 01191 lt gt chg entr You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 enter key The asterisk beside the data type disappears to show that the current values have been saved S 2 I I 040 I01152 01191 lt gt chg entr Next go to the screen that shows the module s discrete output references which are used for fault clearing 2 Q 0 008 Q00916 00923 lt gt chg entr You can also edit this screen Use the F4 enter key to save the selections and continue to the next item Note that all required references for the module must be entered You can give a reference parameter a length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU If you attempt to back out before the references are all configured the HHM displays the following screen Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you exit the references you have configured are not saved Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 49
87. offset from start of table 48 49 Ch1 Low Alarm 22 23 Byte length of discrete diagnostic input data 50 51 Ch1 High Alarm default is 11 24 25 Memory type for the module s diagnostic input 52 65 Ch 2 parameters bits usually type I Enter one of the numbers listed above 26 27 Relative offset from start of table 66 79 Ch 3 parameters 28 29 Byte length of module s control output bits 80 93 Ch 4 parameters 30 31 Memory type for the module s control output 94 107 Ch 5 parameters bits usually type Q Enter one of the numbers listed above 32 33 Relative offset from start of table 108 121 Ch6 parameters 34 bit 4 Line Frequency 0 50HZ 1 60HZ 122 135 Ch7 parameters 34 bits 0 1 Filtering Method 0 None 1 8 average 2 136 149 Ch8 parameters 16 average 35 reserved 150 163 Ch 9 parameters 36 37 Active Channel Bit Map 1 bit per channel 164 177 Ch 10 parameters 38 39 Ch1 Range 178 191 Ch 11 parameters 0 no preselected range P h 12 parameters 1 span 4000 to 20000 units 4 000 to 20 000 192 205 C 2 span 4000 to 20000 units 0 to 32000 2 1 3 span 0 to 20000 units 0 to 32000 Be 2 SLE parameters 4 fer ee 0 to eae i 220 233 Ch 14 parameters Read only when sending a configuration file 7 The module sets the range based on the 234 247 Ch 15 parameters scaling parameters When the configuration is read back it indicates the correct ran
88. or F2 analyze twice B Ifthe Bus Interface Unit is NOT the currently selected device e Select F2 analyze then F3 Block Bus Status e Press the F1 nxt or F2 prev key repeatedly until you reach the serial bus address of the Bus Interface Unit Press F3 to make the Bus Interface Unit the active device Then press the keypad Menu key followed by F2 Monitor Control Reference The HHM s Main Menu for the Bus Interface Unit appears F1 Monitor F2 Configuration 2 Select Fl monitor to display this menu F1 Monitor I O F2 Faults F3 Previous Menu 3 Select F2 faults to display fault information for the Bus Interface Unit and its modules GFK 0825F Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Fault Clearing 6 3 4 The Faults menu appears F1 First 16 Flts F2 Last 16 Flts F3 Previous Menu 5 Press F1 to display the first set of 16 faults one fault at a time For example Slot 1 Fault 01 EXTRA I O MODUL Fault message Use F1 and F2 to lt gt display another exit fault If there are no faults the HHM displays the message No Faults on the top line 6 To display the last 16 faults if any A Press F4 exit to return to the screen shown at the top if this page B Press F2 last 16 faults Clearing Faults Rd EL oe ES If faults are present pressing Clear here has no Se Ge ee eS effect To clear faults from the Hand held Monitor PAD E
89. output overrides again take effect Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Monitor Control I O Data Genius Hand held Monitor A Genius Hand held Monitor can be used to display diagnostics see chapter 8 and current I O states and to force and unforce individual I O points 1 From the HHM Main Menu shown below display the HHM s special set of menus for the Bus Interface Unit F1 HHM UTILITIES F2 ANALYZE F3 CONFIGURATION F4 DEVICE MEMORY A Ifthe Bus Interface Unit is the current selected device press either F3 Configuration or F2 analyze twice B If the Bus Interface Unit is NOT the currently selected device E select F2 analyze then F3 Block Bus Status E Press the F1 nxt or F2 prev key repeatedly until you reach the serial bus address of the Bus Interface Unit Press F3 to make the Bus Interface Unit the active device Then press the keypad Menu key followed by F2 Monitor Control Reference The HHM s Main Menu for the Bus Interface Unit appears F1 Monitor F2 Configuration 2 Select F1 monitor to display this menu F1 Monitor I O F2 Faults F3 Previous Menu 3 Select Fl monitor I O to display I O information for the Bus Interface Unit and its modules GFK 0825F Chapter 7 Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data 7 3 The first screen that appears is the Monitor screen for the first discrete input I
90. outputs 256 bytes 9999 Data can be configured anywhere within the BIU s available memory If the data will be exchanged on the network bus data must be assigned to contiguous memory locations as explained later The following paragraphs describe the types of data the BIU exchanges with conventional I O modules and intelligent I O modules Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F VO Data for Conventional Modules Conventional I O modules provide or receive just one type of I O data sometimes referred to as reference data Normally this data is assigned to the data types shown below however any module s data can be assigned to any data type in BIU memory Type of Module Type of Data discrete inputs analog inputs Al discrete outputs Q analog outputs AQ The BIU reads inputs from all conventional input modules and sends outputs to all conventional output modules during every sweep of operations Field Control Station Bus Interface Unit Conventional a Discrete Input a Modules Al aa conventional nalog Input AQ Modules Sal Conventional Discrete Output Reference Data Modules Is Transferred i Conventional Each BIU Sweep Analog Output Modules I O Data Status Data and Control Data for Intelligent Modules Intelligent modules such as the Micro Field Processor Thermocouple RTD and other intelligen
91. outputs followed by all the analog outputs for the station The PCIM or QBIM will automatically direct the outputs to the Bus Interface Unit each bus scan GFK 0825F Chapter 7 Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data 7 7 Chapter Datagrams S This chapter lists datagrams that can be sent to a Bus Interface Unit and shows the datagrams for Field Control modules that are different from the formats used by other modules It also shows the format of configuration data for the Bus Interface Unit and the modules in the station Datagram Types Read Map Read Map Reply Write Map Report Fault Datagram Format Configuration Data Set Bus Interface Unit Operating Mode Set Micro Field Processor Operating Mode 16 Point Grouped Analog Module Recalibration Datagram For Additional Information Also See The bus controller User s Manual for the PLC or computer which explains the specific programming used to send datagrams The Genius I O System and Communications Manual which describes Genius datagrams and data formats GFK 0825F 8 1 Datagram Types The table below shows the primary datagrams that may be acted upon by the Bus Interface Unit The table lists the types of device that can send each datagram and the resulting action taken by the Bus Interface Unit Datagram Type Subfunction Sent Bus Interface Unit Code From Action Read Identification 00 B
92. previously If you want to change the Serial Bus Address of a previously configured BIU use the Device SBA screen shown below instead When you press F1 Genius Configuration from the Configuration menu the following screen appears Device SBA Serial Bus 14 Address Prv gt entr Press F1 if you want to return to the previous menu On this screen you can change a previously configured Serial Bus Address block number There are 32 available addresses from 0 to 31 on a bus One is needed for the Hand held Monitor typically this is Device Number 0 Another is needed for the Bus Controller Typically this is 31 30 or 31 for redundancy systems A Bus Interface Unit is usually assigned a Serial Bus Address from to 29 or 30 Duplicate SBAs disrupt communications and are not permitted Note If a Bus Interface Unit has a Serial Bus Address conflict on an operating bus it will not scan the modules in the station until the fault is cleared 1 Enter a Serial Bus Address using the HHM keypad 2 Press the F4 entr key An error message appears if the number has been used for another device on the bus If you want to go to the next screen without changing the Serial Bus Address press F2 gt GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 7 5 8 Select the Baud Rate Genius bus communications can occur at any of four baud rates 153 6 Kbaud standard 153 6 Kbaud extended 76 8 Kbaud or 38 4 Kbaud The defa
93. range of the signal Typically they are set at levels beyond which the input should not operate or levels beyond which alternate processing is required They can also be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal ensuring that they will never be activated See the examples below 1 For EACH channel in turn first enter a low alarm value S1 Alarm Ch 01 Lumber oha channel you are 00000 low now eonnouttitg lt gt entr 2 Press F4 entr key 3 Then enter a high alarm value S1 Alarm Ch 01 00000 high lt e gt entr 4 Use the Fl lt and F2 gt keys to select channels 5 Press F4 entr key to save the selection 6 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen A circuit is expected to report engineering unit values of 20 ft sec 6 m sec to 180 ft sec Example 1 50 m sec The high alarm is set at 150 ft sec 40 m sec and the low alarm at 25 ft sec 7 5m sec If an input reached its high alarm a new threshold could be set This could generate a high high alarm or an alarm cleared threshold Example 2 An Alarm Threshold is set at 150 ft sec Upon receiving an alarm message the CPU changes the Alarm Threshold to 165 ft sec by using a Write Configuration command and sends the appropriate Clear Circuit Fault command No alarm message is sent upon changing the threshold unless the speed is greater than 165 ft sec If the speed is only 157 ft sec but increasing a second message w
94. slot 1 11 hex reads packet 1 of intelligent module in slot 1 1 Length in bytes maximum per packet is 128 2 optional If the slot number is 0 the location of the BIU and this byte is not included or if it is set to FF hex the BIU configuration is returned If this byte is set to 01 hex through 10 hex the appropriate group information is returned GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 7 Read Configuration Reply Data Subfunction Code 03 hex This datagram is a reply to the Read Configuration datagram The following pages show the formats of configuration data for Field Control devices Byte Description 0 Slot corresponds to slot supplied in Read Configuration message 1 Length depends on module type 2 N Data format shown on the following pages Write Configuration Data Subfunction Code 04 hex The Write Configuration datagram is used to send configuration data Content of the data is the same as the Read Configuration Reply Do not send partial configuration data Write Configuration Data Format for Field Control Conventional Modules Byte Description 0 Slot Bus Interface Unit is 0 1 Length must match the length for the specific device whose configuration will be written 2 N Data format shown on the following pages Use the Begin and End Packet sequence messages to ensure that a sequence of Write Configuration messages is treated as a single entity Each packet
95. specifications are available from the RTD manufacturer or may be determined by actual measurement RTD Type Low Q High Q Low High Temp Limit Limit Temp Deg Deg C Cc 10 Ohm Copper 25 C 6 13600 14 8200 75 00 150 00 10 Ohm Platinum 25 C 7 02000 37 2599 70 00 1000 00 25 Ohm Platinum 4 14500 74 3089 201 1111 537 77 100 Ohm Nickel 80 88890 147 7700 40 00 140 00 1 KOhm Platinum amp 00375 199 4880 2754 620 200 00 500 00 100 Ohm Platinum amp 00385 27 01 389 936 180 0 850 0 100 Ohm Platinum amp 003902 93 5400 135 000 17 7777 99 9999 100 Ohm Platinum IPTS68 PA 26 5 327 744 200 0 630 0 100 Ohm Platinum SAMA RC21 4 PC 26 5 311 874 200 0 600 0 100 Ohm Platinum JISC 1604 81 26 5 323 780 200 0 620 0 25 5 Ohm Platinum Lab Std PJ 4 50 83 575 200 0 630 0 9 035 Ohm Copper CA 6 05 16 400 100 0 260 0 50 Ohm Copper CB 2 28 379 105 787 100 0 260 0 100 Ohm Copper CB 56 757 211 574 100 0 260 0 100 Ohm Nickel NB 69 520 223 221 60 0 180 0 120 Ohm Nickel NA 66 600 380 310 80 0 260 0 604 Ohm Nickel Iron FA 372 789 1318 722 100 0 204 0 1 KOhm Nickel Iron FB 566 576 1985 891 100 0 204 0 GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 71 5 72 Configuring a Thermocouple Input Module S1 ALG630 fic S1 Al Al008 Al00001 00008 F4 F2 1 1 1 048 i S1 Q Q 016 Q00001 00016 F4 F2 09 O lt gt 2
96. that is selected GFK 0825F A 1 A 2 Scaling Values for 1mV or 14A Engineering Units BIU Version 1 3 For many applications the engineering units are either millivolts or microAmps These units are easy to scale Simply use the table below to find scaling values that are appropriate for the channel s configured range Analog Current Input Module Range To measure Enter this engineering Internal Units e ai current ae value microAmps 4 to 4to20ma_ 4 mA 4 000 tow 4 000 Analog Current Output Module a g current units value ee 4tozoma ama tow f sooo Low o oma u ooo ign a 00 J ee pS om u 20 000 High 20 000_ Analog Current Source Output Module IC670ALG320 in Voltage Mode Range To output this Enter this engineering Internal Units Selected voltage units value microAmps 4 to 20mA 0 to 20mA E a E ET Connect the output load between Volt V and Return RET for the channel being used For 0 to 12 5 voltage place a jumper between RET and JMP on the terminal block Horner Analog Voltage Input Module HE670ADC810 Range To measure Enter this engineering Internal Units E a this a ee E aa 0 to 10 oto tovotts 0 ovs O 10 to 10 volts 10 000 10 000 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Scaling Values for 1mV or 1uA Engineering Units BIU Version 2 0 or Later For many applications the engineering units a
97. the module that will cover the connecting cable It can be removed with pliers or by pressing out from inside the module housing oe Cable Slot 2 Power to the I O Station should be OFF Connecting Cable 3 cross section 3 To install Bus Interface Unit on the terminal block position the module so that the cable slot in the module housing is over the Wo K connecting cable Press the module down firmly Excessive force may damage the equipment 3 After placing the Bus Interface Unit onto the terminal block tighten its screws to secure it Maximum recommended torque is 9 in Ibs Warnings Explosion hazard When in hazardous locations turn off power before replacing or the BIU Personal injury system malfunction and or damage to the equipment may occur Equipment labeled with reference to Class I Groups A B C and D Div 2 hazardous locations is suitable for use only in non hazardous locations or in Class I Div 2 Groups A B C and D locations Explosion hazard Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2 Removing the Bus Interface Unit from the Terminal Block 1 Power to the I O Station should be Off Do Not Tilt ee 2 Loosen the Bus Interface Unit retaining screws Caution Be sure screws are fully disengaged Attempting to remove the module with screw s partially engaged may gt damage the equipment 3 Pull the Bus Interface Unit module straight away from the
98. to change the state of the output at the present cursor location 5 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure a Conventional Analog Input Module GFK 0825F S1 Mod Type Analog 8 cur In F4 y S1 Al 08 Al F4 y S1 Al 08 Al001 A1008 _ Fay S1 Ref Address Al00001 Foy FI S1 Faults Ch 01 YYYYYYYY F2 y A F1 S1 Active Ch 01 YYYYYYYY roy Ft S1 Range Ch 01 OMA 20mA F2 y A F1 Range for other channels F2 y A F1 S1 Scale 1 Ch 01 00000 Eng lo F1 S1 Scale 1 Ch 01 20000 Eng hi Foy FA S1 Scale 4 Ch 01 00000 Int lo AFA F2 y S1 Scale 4 Ch 01 20000 Int hi F2 y A F1 Scaling Units for other channels Foy Ft S1 Alarm Ch01 00000 low F2 y F1 S1 Alarm Ch01 00000 high F2y M Alarm Limits for other channels F2 F1 S1 Hid Lst State NO BE After you accept a module into the slot a screen like this appears S 1 AI 08 Number of AI references for this module type tgl entr Assign I O References for the Module Specify the I O references to be used by the module For most applications you can simply have the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that memory type Alternately you can enter specific references for the module A To assign the next ava
99. will never be activated After entering the Low Alarm Limit press the F4 enter key Then enter the High Alarm Limit for the channel S 2 CH1 ALRM HI 10000 lt gt chg entr That completes the configuration steps for one input channel on the 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input module Continue as described above to configure the rest of the inputs Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 55 5 56 gt S1 Al Al016 A100001 00016 F4 F2 S1 1 072 100001 00072 F4 F2 Y S1 Q Q016 Q00001 00016 F4 F2 y S1 Module gt l DEFAULT ZERO F2 y Ft S1 Module gt Al DEFAULT ZERO F2 Y AF1 S1 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO F2 y FI S1 FILTERING 20MS F2 y fe S1 LINE FREQ 60 HZ F2 F1 S1 ALG282 1 0 S1 CH 1 CONFIG F1 F2 select channel F2 y Fi S1 CH1 RANGE 10V to 10V F2 y F1 S1 CH1 ENG LO 10000 F2 y F1 S1 CH1 ENG HI 10000 F2 y Fi S1 CH1 SPAN LO 10000 F2 y F1 S1 CH1 SPAN HI 10000 AF1 F2 Y S1 CH1 ALRM LO 10000 r2 y Ft S1 CH1 AL HI 10000 F2 y Ft Repeat for other channels F2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 Configure a 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module When you select Read from the empty slot HHM screen this module screen appears 2 ALG282 1 0 del Zoom Assign I O Ref
100. 20 none above 32 33 Relative offset from start of table 34 35 Byte length of analog output data should be set to 0 48 49 Wire type for input 1 0 3 wire 1 4 wire 36 37 Mema type for the module s analog output bits Not 50 51 Low Alarm for input 1 32767 to 32767 used 38 39 Relative offset from start of table 52 53 High Alarm for input 1 32767 to 32767 40 41 Line Frequency 0 50Hz 1 60 Hz 54 55 Offset for input 1 0 to 3276 7 42 43 Channel Active flag for input 1 0 inactive 1 56 69 Ch 2 parameters active 44 45 Conversion type for input 1 0 1 10 ohms 1 70 83 Ch 3 parameters linearized temperature in 1 10 degrees C 2 84 97 Cha parameters linearized temperature in 1 10 degrees F 3 percent of span Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Additional Configuration Data for a Thermocouple Input Module The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 187 for a Thermocouple module IC670ALG630 is listed below Byte Description Byte Description 14 Number of input reference parameters 2 48 49 Thermocouple type for input 1 only used for 15 Number of output reference parameters 2 ae oe A i PUES aie 16 17 Byte length of analog input data l a 7 z 18 19 Memory type for the module s analog input data 3 T 11 p usually type Al Enter one of the following 4 E 12 Pl
101. 3 change key if you want to change the Low Alarm Limit and enter the new value 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item High Alarm Limit Next set the high alarm limit for an RTD The range is 32 767 to 32 767 The high alarm limit must be greater than the low alarm limit S 1 CH1 ALARM HI 800 lt gt chg entr 1 Use the F3 change key if you want to change the High Alarm Limit and enter the new value 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item 5 70 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Resistance The RTD Resistance is a resistance adjustment that can change the Ohms value of an input Its use is optional The range is 0 to 3276 7 The value is entered and displayed in tenths of Ohms S 1 RESIST 1 Tenths of Ohms 00000 lt gt chg entr The resistance value is used to correct for RTD values that are not at the nominal value For example if a 100 Ohm platinum RTD is being used and it measures 99 Ohms at 25 C instead of the nominal 100 Ohms at 25 C the value 990 should be entered here to correct the temperature readings 1 Use the F3 change key if you want to change the RTD Resistance 2 Enter the new value in tenths of ohms 3 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next channel RTD Resistance
102. 34 35 Local Default Output 0 off 1 hold 90 99 Ch 6 parameters 36 37 BIU command timeout in milliseconds 100 109 Ch7 parameters 500 to 65535 38 39 Active Channels One bit per channel For each 110 119 Ch 8 parameters channel 0 inactive 1 active Default is OxFF all active GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 25 8 26 Additional Configuration Data for a Micro Field Processor Module The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 43 for a Micro Field Processor module IC670MFP100 is listed below Byte Description Byte Description 14 Number of input reference parameters 2 28 29 Byte length of the number of outputs from the BIU to the MFP s table 0 64 15 Number of output reference parameters 2 30 31 BIU table to get data for the MF P s table Enter one of the numbers listed above 16 17 Byte length of number of inputs to BIU from the 32 33 Byte offset of from the start of the selected BIU table MFP s discrete output Q table 0 64 to get data for the MFP s table 0 255 18 19 BIU table to place Q data from the MFP Enter 34 35 Byte length of the number of outputs from the BIU to one of the following numbers the MFP s Al table 0 254 a 36 37 BIU table to get data for the MFP s Al table Enter 10 Al table one of the numbers listed above 12 AQ table 20 21 Byte offset from the start of the selected BIU 38 39 Byte offset of from the start
103. 9 GFK 0825F Note the position of the card guide with respect to the metal housing for reassembly 46547 card guide 4 Hold your hand behind the module to retain the board set and turn the module face up 5 Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into either of the holes from which you previously removed the module retaining screws Pry the two halves of the plastic latch inward to free that side of the card guide Repeat on the other side 46548 latch 3 7 Remove the dual board set and card guide from the housing 8 Replace the EEPROM on the board with the EEPROM containing the new firmware for the BIU 9 Reinsert the board set into the module housing taking care to align the card guide with the screw holes in the housing 10 When the card guide is in position press downward gently on the back of the card guide to seat the latches Check the front of the module to be sure they have seated correctly 11 Reinstall the Bus Interface Unit on the BIU Terminal Block 12 Using a Hand held Monitor version 4 6 or later reconfigure the I O Station GFK 0825F Chapter 3 Installation 3 17 Chapter 4 GFK 0825F Operation This chapter explains how a Bus Interface Unit interacts with the modules in its station how it stores data and how it exchanges data with the system host BIU Data Handling at the I O Station The BIU Sweep BIU Backplane Scan Time
104. 90 70 PLC handles input data from BIU 4 10 Series 90 70 PLC Bus Controller version 1 9 configuration special instructions 5 2 CPU version required for Field Control 1 9 Series Five PLC Bus Controller version 1 9 fault clearing 6 5 handles input data from BIU 4 10 monitoring I O data reference address version required Series Six PLC Bus Controller version 1 9 fault clearing 6 5 handles input data from BIU 4 10 monitoring I O data 7 6 reference address version required Set BIU Mode datagram 8 29 Set Micro Field Processor Mode datagram 8 29 Signal wiring 3 3 C 1 Slot number Specifications See individual I O module datasheets electrical 2 9 environmental 1 5 noise 1 5 temperature vibration 1 Standards Suppression at the communications line B 2 Surge suppressors Synchronization Synchronization module 4 5 4 6 Synchronous operation of BIU and MFP 4 16 T Temperature specifications 1 5 Terminal Block installing on DIN rail removing from DIN rail Terminating the bus 3 11 Index Index Thermocouple Input module Alarm Limits 5 78 Channel Active configuration steps 5 72 data defaults 5 74 TO references Line frequency Offset 580 Open Thermocouple diagnostic5 75 Range Type 5 77 Reference Junction Compensation Reference Junction value Thermocouple type 5 77 Units 5 76 Thermocouple type Unit
105. ATCH faults One such fault appears for each non matching data type and length Depending on the PLC s own configuration CONFIGURATION MISMATCH faults may be either diagnostic only or fatal shutting down the system To avoid problems you can do either of the following method A is preferred A Check the PLC configuration to determine whether CONFIGURATION MISMATCH is set up as a fatal fault If it is powering up the bus and Bus Interface Unit then assigning a serial bus address will cause a fatal error and shut down the PLC If CONFIGURATION MISMATCH is a diagnostic fault you can install the Bus Interface Unit on the bus and power it up before configuring its serial bus address The Bus Interface Unit will start communicating immediately generating CONFIGURATION MISMATCH faults Complete the configuration ignoring the faults temporarily When you complete the Bus Interface Unit configuration the Bus Interface Unit drops off the bus briefly generating a LOSS OF DEVICE fault When it returns an ADDITION OF DEVICE diagnostic appears If no new mismatch faults occur after the Bus Interface Unit comes back on the bus check the timestamp on the faults the I O maps match in the PLC and in the Bus Interface Unit If CONFIGURATION MISMATCH is a fatal fault configure the Bus Interface Unit s serial bus address and I O map offline before installing the Bus Interface Unit HHM setup instructions for offline configuration are on t
106. C HHM send Read ID Reply Read Configuration 02 BC HAM send Read Configuration Reply Write Configuration 04 BC HHM _ process possibly send configuration changes Assign Monitor 05 BC process Begin Packet Sequence 06 BC HHM start sequence End Packet Sequence 07 BC HAM end check sequence Pulse Test 10 HHM send Pulse Test Complete Clear All Faults 13 BC HHM process Set Status Table Address 17 BC HHM process Force BSM 1A BC HHM process send config change Unforce BSM 1B BC HHM _ process send config change when last point is unforced Switch BSM 1C BC process Set MFP Operating Mode 21 BC Recalibrate Analog Module 21 BC Read Map 2A BC HHM send Read Map Reply Write Map 2C BC HHM process autoconfigure Set Operating Mode 39 BC process Read O Forces 40 BC send Read I O Forces Reply Read Slot Diagnostics 42 BC e Read Slot Diagnostics eply A PLC or computer can send a datagram to the Bus Interface Unit in the same manner as sending a datagram to an I O block or Bus Controller 8 2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Read Map Subfunction Code 2A hex This datagram is used to read the reference addresses and lengths that have been configured for the BIU s network I O map Data Field Format none Read Map Reply Subfunction Code 2B hex A Bus Interface Unit sends this reply datagram after receiving a Read Map datagram It contains the previously configured BIU network map ad
107. Configure Data Defaults For data types AI and I you can determine what the BIU should do with the module s data if the BIU loses communications with the module Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero You can accept DEFAULT ZERO with the F4 enter key or press F3 toggle then F4 enter to change to DEFAULT HOLD and save it S 2 Module gt I DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr S 2 Module gt I DEFAULT HOLD lt gt tgl entr S 2 Module gt AI DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr For data going to the module type Q which is included within the BIU s I O map you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network S 2 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr 5 50 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure Filtering Next select the filtering delay to eliminate noise due to the AC power lines Filtering increases the response time to changes in a channel The choices for filtering are A None The module returns the most recent sample of the input B 10 ms The module averages the most recent 8 samples of the input B 20 ms The module averages the most recent 16 samples of the input The module will perform filtering on all inputs on the module that are configured as active S 2 FILTERING
108. Control in a Genius Bus Redundancy System eeseeessseeceessseeeeeeees 1 11 DGS CHIU OM ciiecisss svssssssssccsacasvssa ssdswssssassvssssssdeCesesssveasesssscsssadeneaseeassieboadsvissiassveees 2 1 Genius Bus Interface Unit 4 222 s25 ec Shs teehee these tee en enh 2 1 Bus Interface Unit Power Supply errer rssirssriserer torrer perroti rero eroro Et eso e rL o TPE Se aS 2 3 Backplane Current e a e e ea a e a A EE neon 2 4 Bus Interface Unit Power Dissipation esesseeessseesssrersssrrerssrierssrierssrerssrrrerssreesssrressse 2 5 Load Requirements for Hardware Components ssseeeesseeesssreessrrerssrrersssrresssrrerssrrersee 2 6 Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block eee eeescecceesseeceessacecsessaeeecesssnaeeeseesaeeeeesaaeees 2 8 Functional Specifications 2 0 0 ecseeeessecccessseeecessceeceesseeeccessaeeesesseeecessaaeesessaeeeeesaeees 2 9 Tan CAMARGO i PE EEA E E AE 3 1 Preinstallation Check wu a kak k ada kaka tad Gand RAAAAAR ARAN AAR aaa 3 2 Static Protection sasra o o E a teens tees es eee 3 2 Hand held Monitor Connector eeeeeeeessececessseeeceessceeceessaeeecessaeeecessaeeseesaeeeeesnaeees 3 2 System Wiring Guidelines a cnn a naan Aceh da dada ka deeG dawn dawned 3 3 Installing Additional Suppression eesseeceessccceessseceeeessaeeesessaeeecessaeeecessaeeeeesaeees 3 3 SAAK onata ti tA AAAA 3 4 Locations for Field Control eeeseseseeeseseeessssressssrerssrresssrrrerssrterssrresssreeesssreesssree
109. DL242 100017 100024 Slot 3 5 12 24VDC 16 Point Output Module IC670MDL742 Q00001 Q00016 Slot 4 8 Point Relay Output Module IC670MDL930 Q00017 Q00024 D 1 2 Example 2 Discrete and Analog Data Network Processing In this T O Station there are both discrete and analog I O modules All data is included within the T O map that is configured for the Bus Interface Module and exchanged over the network There is no local Micro Field Processor BIU Map 100001 100112 Q00001 Q00040 A100001 A100024 AQ00001 AQ00004 No synchronization is required Slot 1 12VDC 16 Point Pos Neg Input Module 100001 100016 IC670MDL640 Slot 2 120VAC 8 Point Isolated Input Module IC670MDL242 100017 100024 Slot 3 5 12 24VDC 16 Point Output Module C670MDL742 QO0001 QO0016 Slot 4 8 Point Relay Output Module IC670MDL930 Q00017 Q00024 Slot 5 8 Channel Analog Input Module IC670ALG230 AI00001 AIO00008 Slot 6 High level 16 Channel Analog Input Module IC670ALG240 analog inputs AI00009 A100024 diagnostic inputs 100025 100112 control outputs Q00025 Q00040 Slot 7 4 Channel Analog Output Module IC670ALG320 AQO0001 AQO0004 D 2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F 2 Example 3 Discrete and Analog Data Network and Local Processing In this T O Station there are discrete and analog I O modules and a Micro Field Processor
110. Data LSB Byte39 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Length of Data MSB Submove 2 Byte 40 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Source Table Segment Selector Byte 41 71 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Destination Table Segment Selectot 3 2110 Source Offset in bytes LSB 3 2110 Source Offset in bytes MSB Byte 42 7 Byte 43 7 Byte 44 716 5 4 3 2 1 0 Destination Offset in bytes LSB Byte 45 71 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Destination Offset in bytes MSB Byte 46 71615 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Length of Data LSB Byte 47 71 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte Length of Data MSB The high byte of address 2 of the pointer is not used it must be zero The low byte of address 2 specifies the type of memory where the Status Pointer will be located For This Memory Type Enter This Number discrete input table 16 Q discrete output table 18 R register memory 8 Al analog input table 10 AQ analog output table 12 8 28 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Set Bus Interface Unit Operating Mode Subfunction Code 39 hex This datagram can be used to set the operating mode of the Genius Bus Interface Unit Byte No Byte Description 0 Mode 1 Mode This message has two copies of the mode parameter These copies must be equal for the command to be accepted by the Bus Interface Unit If you disable the network the BIU sends no inputs and receives no o
111. ENA is the component within the Bus Interface Unit that handles the Genius bus interface Pressing the Clear Faults key clears all faults currently in the fault table This sets the fault count to zero and sends a Clear command to the Bus Interface Unit GFK 0825F Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Fault Clearing 6 5 Chapter Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data A This chapter explains how to monitor or control Field Control I O data using a Genius Hand held Monitor or a programmer e Overview Forcing Circuits Overriding I O Circuits e Monitor Control I O Data Genius Hand held Monitor Changing the Reference Type Being Displayed Displaying Another Reference Changing the Display Mode Forcing Unforcing the Displayed Reference e Monitor Control I O Data Series 90 PLC Reference Tables Display from the PLC e Monitor Control I O Data Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC Field Control Data in I O Table Memory Field Control Data in Register Memory Mixed Reference Table Displays e Monitor Control I O Data Computer If you are using another type of programmer software please consult the documentation supplied with that software for instructions GFK 0825F 7 1 7 2 Overview There are two ways to manipulate I O data in a station A by forcing an input or output to assume a desired state or value that will be stored in the BIU s EEPROM memory This is done with a Hand held Monitor no equipment other than the I O module s is re
112. FK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 61 Input Scaling The 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module performs its own scaling unlike conventional Field Control analog modules whose scaling is performed by the BIU Scaling can be used to define a linear relationship between a channel s input voltage in millivolts mV and the value in engineering units returned to the BIU The default scaling configuration provides values from 10 000 to 10 000 for an input voltage range of 10V low span value to 10V high span value To scale a channel choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value span and a corresponding engineering units value for each During operation the module will use these values to convert input voltages into digital values that represent engineering units Scaling does not increase the resolution of the data but it does transform the values returned to the BIU into more convenient units If the scaled data falls below the minimum for engineering units the module returns the minimum engineering units value 32767 If the scaled data rises above the maximum for engineering units the module returns the maximum engineering units value 32767 The illustration below shows the module s default scaling 15000 l High Point 10000 l l l I l l l l 10000 15000 10250 15000 Low Point 15000 Input Voltage in millivolts The first
113. G 14 2 1mm2 or two AWG 16 1 3mm2 wires per terminal The wires into a terminal should be the same type and size Wires must be copper conductors rated for 75 degrees C 167 degrees F only Suggested torque for the terminal screws is 9 in Ibs 3 Connect the ground terminal to the conductive mounting panel with a 4 inch maximum length of AWG 14 avg 2 1mm or larger wire Use hardware such as star washers to ensure ground integrity GFK 0825F Chapter 3 Installation 3 9 Connecting the Communications Bus 3 10 The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block has a two sets of bus terminals The terminals in the center portion of the terminal block are for the main bus cable they are always used The outermost set of bus terminals is for an optional redundant dual bus cable The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block has built in bus switching capability do not attach a Bus Switching Module in a dual bus application 46462 Redundant Bus Serial 1 8 B1 Connections J Taa e Q B2 joptionay Shield Out 8 Bin amp Bout Shield Out 9 Aout Main Bus J aeei Q Ain Connections Serial B a2 3 Al Terminals accept one AWG 14 2 1mm or two AWG 14 avg 2 1mm2 cross section copper 75 deg C 167 deg F wires Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires The wires on any terminal should be the same type The suggested torque is 9 in lbs 1 Nm Bus Cables Bus connecti
114. Input 3 circuit configuration see above 98 Input 7 circuit configuration see above 43 reserved 99 reserved 44 45 low scaling point eng units lsb in byte 44 100 101 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 100 46 47 high scaling point eng units lsb in byte 46 102 103 high scaling point eng units Isb in byte 102 48 49 low scaling point digital counts 104 105 low scaling point digital counts lsb in byte 48 Isb in byte 104 50 51 high scaling point digital counts 106 107 high scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 50 Isb in byte 106 52 53 low alarm limit Isb in byte 52 108 109 low alarm limit Isb in byte 108 54 55 high alarm limit Isb in byte 54 110 111 high alarm limit Isb in byte 110 56 Input 4 circuit configuration see above 112 Input 8 circuit configuration see above 57 reserved 113 reserved 58 59 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 58 114 115 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 114 60 61 high scaling point eng units 116 117 high scaling point eng units Isb in byte 60 Isb in byte 116 62 63 low scaling point digital counts 118 119 low scaling point digital counts lsb in byte 62 Isb in byte 118 64 65 high scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 64 120 121 high scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 120 66 67 low alarm limit Isb in byte 66 122 123 low alarm limit Isb in byte 122 68 69 high alarm limit Isb in
115. Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Backing Up Micro Field Processor Outputs The network can back up outputs normally controlled by the Micro Field Processor if the MFP fails or goes into Stop Faulted mode To create this backup capability for one or more output modules do the following 1 Configure the module outputs to lie within both the BIU s Network Map and the MFP s I O map For example Output References A Ic Bus Interface Unit Outputs Hg Q00001 Q00016 lt Q00001 Q00128 I g Network a Map Q00017 Q00128 S g Q g Q00001 Q00016 I Micro Field Processor Outputs Q00001 Q00128 Q00017 Q00128 SISPP H OP P OP GYG O Module Outputs L Q00001 Q00016 sloppislslepisiolssislo epe pl sis EJON 46738 2 Configure Hold Last State not Default for the MFP output table GFK 0825F Chapter 4 Operation 4 17 How the Network Backs Up MFP Outputs This technique works because of the synchronization between the operations of the Bus Interface Unit and the Micro Field Processor The diagram below shows details of the BIU MFP synchronization process The numbers on the left side are the same as the numbers on the synchronization diagram Bus Interface Unit
116. NNYY my Y S1 Active CH 01 NYYN S1 Range Ch 01 OmA 20MA py E Danna far ather channele E S1 Scale 1 Ch 01 00000 Eng lo RY S1 Scale 1 Ch 01 00000 Eng hi RY S1 Scale 4 Ch 01 00000 Int lo py E S1 Scale 4 Ch 01 00000 Int hi py E Gealina T hito foar other channels TLP e GFK 0825F After you accept a module into the slot a screen like this appears S 1 AQ 04 Number of A references for Q this module type tgl entr Assign I O References for the Module Specify the I O references to be used by the module For most applications you can simply have the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that memory type Alternately you can enter specific references for the module A To assign the next available references just press F4 entr B If you want to change to another type of I O table press F3 toggle C If you want to assign specific references enter the starting address Press F4 entr For most applications all module references should fall within the network map configured for the Bus Interface Unit For local control a module can be configured outside the BIU network map In addition each data type I Q AI AQ has a total of 256 bytes allocated within the BIU So for each data type all references must be located within a 256 byte range For example if the starting address for analog output da
117. Neg Points 83 C670MDL642 nput Module 125 VDC 16 Grouped Pos Neg Points 71 C670MDL643 nput Module 5 12 VDC 16 Point 80 C670MDL644 nput Module 12 24 VDC 16 Grouped Pos Neg Fast Inputs 80 C670MDL730 Output Module 8 Pt 24 VDC Electronic Short Circuit P rotection 125 C670MDL740 Output Module 12 24 VDC 0 5 Amp 16 Grouped Pos 111 C670MDL742 Output Module 5 12 24 VDC Negative Outputs 111 C670MDL330 Output Module 16 Point 12 120 VAC 16 Pt 1 0 Amp 285 C670MDL331 Output Module 120 VAC 2 Amp 8 Isolated P oints 154 C670MDL930 Relay Output Module 2 Amp 6 Form A Points and 2 Isolated 313 Form C Points C670ALG230 Analog Current Input Module 8 Grouped Points 51 C670ALG240 Analog Input Module 16 point Grouped 251 C670ALG281 Analog Voltage Input Module 8 Grouped P oints 150 C670ALG282 Analog Voltage Input Module 16Grouped P oints 150 HE670ACC100 Input Simulator Module Horner 100 HE670ADC810 Analog Input Module Horner 10VDC 0 10 VDC 131 C670ALG620 RTD Input Module 190 C670ALG630 Thermocouple Input Module 195 C670ALG 320 Analog Current Voltage Output Module 4 Grp Points 51 C670ALG 330 Analog Current source Output Module 8 Points 85 C670MFP 100 Micro Field Processor 111 C693PRG300 Hand held Programmer 170 C660HHM501 Genius Hand held Monitor 0 Hand held Monitor and Hand held Programmer The Genius Hand held Monitor IC660HHMS501 used for configuring and monitoring the BIU has its own battery and does not add to the load on the BIU
118. PU type or the actual amount of output data needed for the modules physically present in the station Either length may be zero The discrete inputs appear in the input message in the same sequence as their assigned input references Each discrete input module occupies one byte per eight circuits The analog inputs are also in the same sequence as their assigned input references Each analog input module occupies two bytes one word for each analog channel The Bus Interface Unit sends this data from its internal I and AI memories beginning at the start locations selected during station configuration Input Defaults When configuring input modules either a default state or hold last state can be selected If an input module is removed or fails to operate correctly the chosen state is substituted for actual input data A diagnostic message is provided to indicate loss of module Forced input data is not affected VO Data Handling by Host How the host handles input data from the Bus Interface Unit depends on the host type A Series 90 70 PLC places the data in the I and AI references selected during PLC configuration These must be the same references selected during Bus Interface Unit configuration E A Series Six or Series Five PLC places the data into I O table or register memory A beginning address in Series Six or Series Five I O Table memory can be entered during station configuration E A host computer with a PCIM modul
119. Processor none 0 00 1 00 Estimated backplane scan time 9 07 mS GFK 0825F Chapter 4 Operation 4 7 Example 2 Five modules one Group Data Move Genius bus speed is 26mS Slot Module Data per Module Time per Total Time word byte inmS 1 Conventional analog output module 4 words AQ 500 2 00 2 Conventional analog input module 8 words AI 500 4 00 3 Conventional discrete output module 2 bytes Q 150 0 30 4 Conventional discrete input module 2 bytes I 150 0 30 5 16 Point Grouped Analog Input 16 words AI 150 2 40 Module IC670ALG240 11 bytes I 090 0 99 2 bytes Q 090 0 18 number of modules 5 500 2 50 Total O 12 67 12 67 X 0 8 X 2 25 26 mS 11 23 mS Groups 64 bytes Internal BIU 0 96 table move Micro Field Processor none 0 00 1 00 Estimated backplane scan time 13 19 mS Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Data Transfer Between the BIU and the Host GFK 0825F Each bus scan a Bus Interface Unit exchanges the following data with the host E It sends an input message with up to 128 bytes of discrete and or analog inputs E It receives an output message with up to 128 bytes of discrete and or analog outputs The exact length of these messages is determined by the network I O map configured for the Bus Interface Unit Data in the BIU s Network Bus Map As mentioned previously
120. Report Faults YES lt gt tgl entr If you want to set up partial fault reporting for the station you can set fault reporting to YES here but inhibit fault reporting for some or all individual modules in the station Instructions for setting up or inhibiting fault reporting for individual modules are included in the module configuration portion of this chapter 1 If you want to go to the next screen without making a change press F2 gt If the Report Faults selection should be changed press F3 tgl 2 Press F4 entr to save the change and go to the next menu 5 10 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure Genius Bus Redundancy If the Bus Interface Unit will be used as a bus switching device itself or located on a bus stub downstream of another device that acts as a bus switching device BSM Present should be set to YES For all other applications set it to NO BSM Present NO lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to go to the next screen without making a change press F2 gt If the selection should be changed press F3 tgl 2 Press F4 entr E If you selected NO go to the next page E If you selected YES the following screen appears BSM Controller NO lt gt tgl entr 3 If the Bus Interface Unit will be used as the bus switching device itself set BSM Controller to YES For all other applications set it to NO N
121. Suppression It is possible some installations might exceed the surge immunity capabilities specified in chapter 1 This is most likely in outdoor installations or where the power source is from another building or ground system It is prudent to provide local transient protection Appendix B describes installation of additional suppression at the power and communications lines GFK 0825F Chapter 3 Installation 3 3 3 4 System Grounding All components of a control system and the devices it controls must be properly grounded Ground conductors should be connected in a star fashion with all branches routed to a central earth ground point as shown below This ensures that no ground conductor carries current from any other branch Motor Drives and her Electrical Programming Each Terminal n a Machinery Device Block Equipment Signal and power Ground Point connections not shown is a NOTE Earth Central Each Field Control Terminal Block has a chassis ground terminal for safety and noise protection This terminal should be connected to the conductive mounting panel with a 4 inch maximum length of AWG 14 avg 2 1mm wire Use hardware such as star washers to ensure ground integrity The control panel and enclosure should also be bonded to the plant system ground per code Inadequate grounding may compromise system integrity in the presence of power switching transients and surges Field
122. T O map you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network S 4 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr S 4 Network gt AQ DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Line Frequency Next set the line frequency for the module Select 50 or 60 Hz S 1 LINE FREQ 60 HZ lt gt tgl entr Suppress Open Thermocouple Diagnostic S 4 OTC SUPPRESS NO lt gt tgl entr Configure whether the module should perform Open Thermocouple diagnostics on the input data 1 Select NO the default if the module should perform Open Thermocouple diagnostics Select YES if it should not 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 75 5 76 Circuit Configuration The following features are configured for each channel in turn Channel Active S 4 CH 1 ACTIVE lt gt tgl entr When a channel is configured as Active it is scanned for data and checked for errors If a channel should not be scanned that channel can be configured as inactive An inactive input channel returns the value 0 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to t
123. The intelligent processing capabilities of the Genius Bus Interface Unit allow the configuration of features such as fault reporting selectable input and output defaults analog scaling and analog range selection for the modules in the station In addition the Genius Bus Interface Unit performs diagnostic checks on itself and its I O modules and relays diagnostic information to the host if configured for fault reporting and to a Hand held Monitor The Genius Bus Interface Unit can be used on a bus controlled by redundant CPUs or Bus Controllers It can also be used on a dual bus The Bus Interface Unit mounts on a Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block It can be removed and replaced if necessary without removing the wiring or reconfiguring the I O station Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block which included with the BIU has connections for power wiring and single or dual communications cables It has built in bus switching circuitry allowing the Bus Interface Unit to be used on a dual redundant Genius bus no external Bus Switching Module is needed The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block stores the configuration parameters selected for the station VO Modules Field Control I O Modules are available in many types to suit a wide range of application needs Modules can be installed and removed without disturbing field wiring One or two I O modules may be mounted on an I O Terminal Block Micro Field Proce
124. U redundancy which can be used for backup CPU Bus Controller protection in critical applications is described in detail in the Genius documentation The section that follows here summarizes how Field Control products can fit into a Genius CPU Redundancy system CPU Bus Controller Redundancy Overview In CPU redundancy two Bus Controllers on the same bus can send control outputs at the same time Both Bus Controllers automatically receive inputs and fault reports from all devices on the bus that have been configured as being in CPU Redundancy mode The Bus Controllers must use serial bus addresses device numbers 30 and 31 Field Control stations can be used on a bus controlled by redundant CPUs Bus Controllers Bus Bus aon Controller Controller Device 30 Device 31 LA ii How the two sets of outputs from the dual CPUs are handled by a Bus Interface Unit depends on whether the Bus Interface Unit is set up for Hot Standby or Duplex redundancy If the station contains any analog modules the only form of CPU redundancy permitted is Hot Standby Hot Standby CPU Redundancy A Bus Interface Unit configured for Hot Standby mode is normally controlled by the Bus Controller assigned to serial bus address 31 If no outputs are available from 31 for three bus scans the Bus Interface Unit accepts outputs from the Bus Controller assigned to serial bus address 30 If outputs are not available from either Bus Cont
125. Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Configure the Line Frequency Next set the line frequency for the module Select 50 or 60 Hz Disturbances due to AC noise cause variations around the desired DC level The amplitude of these variations can be reduced by configuring the rate at which the module scans inputs for the operating frequency If the line frequency is configured at 60 Hz the module scans each input channel every 1 04 milliseconds If the line frequency is configured at 50 Hz the module scans each input channel every 1 25 mS S 2 LINE FREQ 60 HZ lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the first circuit configuration screen GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 59 5 60 Circuit Configuration The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the Hand held Monitor and the BIU Channel Header If the BIU and Hand held Monitor support display of channel headers a header screen appears for each channel as shown below S 1 CH 1 CONFIG lt gt zoom A Press F2 gt from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel Pressing F2 gt from channel 8 displays the module s first reference parameter screen B Press F1 lt from this screen to go to the
126. VET ER MAB MOSR Y you need to do the following F2 i 1 Return to the HHM Main Menu Po ieee Ca T 2 Press F2 Analyze F3 BLOCK BUS STS PG EU SES SE ee 3 Press F3 Block Bus Status F3 4 Press the Clear key REES a tui a Clearing faults from the Hand held Monitor does MON E ORE E o ts g ane not clear faults at the host PLC To keep the entire system in step and up to date fault clearing should be performed from the host PLC 6 4 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Display and Clear Faults from a PLC A PLC places faults from a Field Control station in the I O and PLC Fault Tables Series 90 PLC I O Fault Table The content of the I O fault display depends on the revision level of the PLC s Bus Controller module and the type of programmer software being used With a Bus Controller that is version 4 6 or later when a fault occurs on a Field Control station the I O Fault Table shows the station ID and the rack and slot within the station where the fault has occurred 14 0 4 Serial Bus Address pe Rack Slot If the Bus Controller is only a rev 3 version it cannot transfer to the PLC the detailed fault information provided by a Bus Interface Unit Instead a rev 3 Bus Controller reports any fault from a remote station as a GENA fault To clear the fault table press the Clear F9 key You must clear the I O Fault Table from the programming software for the faul
127. a S 1 AQ AQ 008 AQ00025 00032 lt gt chg entr GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 91 5 92 You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 enter key The asterisk beside the data type disappears to show that the current values have been saved Valid values for analog output data length are 0 8 If this length is set to less than 8 and the module has not been previously configured the outputs of unused channels will go to OmA However if the module has been configured previously and is reconfigured to use fewer channels the channels that are removed will continue to output current at their previously configured levels until the module is reset S 1 AQ AQ 008 AQ00025 00032 lt gt chg entr Pressing F2 gt moves you to the screen that shows the module s discrete output bits which can be used by the host for clearing faults Valid lengths for this data type are 0 16 The data must lie on byte boundaries entered lengths and reference addresses are automatically adjusted if necessary S 1 Q 0 016 001817 01832 lt gt chg entr Edit the reference address and length if needed Press F4 enter to save the selections Entries must be made for data types I Q and AQ If you do not want to use one of these data types give it a length of zero If you back out using F1 lt or MENU before all data types have been configured the HHM displays the following screen
128. a Moves VO ee configuration D 6 enable disable 5 15 configuring VO Table displa LM90 70 7 6 TO Table memory for S6 or S5 PLC 5 9 H T O Terminal Blocks introduction 1 4 Hand held Monitor Input power A ients used to clear faults 6 3 Input Range used to monitor I O data 7 3 Hand held Monitor Connector Hand held Monitor Inputs attaching to BIU for confi guration 5 3 r ading 45 connector on BIU 2 1 version required with Field Control Intelligent modules 4 6 HHM Menus for Field Control Grouped Analog Input module 5 45 5 53 5 61 5 96 Hold Last State Default L Analog input module 5 34 Analog output Module 5 36 LEDs 2 2 Discrete input module Line Frequency discrete output module 5 25 Grouped Analog Input module 5 43 5 51 5 59 Host computer 1 7 RTD module 5 66 handles input data from BIU 4 10 Thermocouple input module 5 75 VO service Load requirements 2 6 Host CPU Locations for I O modules 3 5 Hot Insertion Logic power 2 3 Hot standby redundanc 5 12 Logicmaster 90 70 Humidity specification monitoring I O data 7 6 software version required 1 9 T O data forcing Micro Field Processor handling backing up outputs override backing up outputs from network 4 18 transfer with host configuring 5 99 VO Fault Table at PLC 6 5 data defaults 5 101 VO Ma 4 2 TO references 5 100 BE introduction 1 3 ee data for the BIU 5 16
129. able Types The cable types listed in the preceding table are recommended for use If the cable types listed above are not available the cable selected must meet the following guidelines 1 High quality construction Most important is uniformity of cross section along the length of the cable Poor quality cable may cause signal distortion and increase the possibility of damage during installation Precision twisted shielded wire of EIA RS422 standard type having a uniform number of twists per unit of length In a catalog this type of cable may also be listed as twinaxial cable data cable or computer cable Relatively high characteristic impedance 100 to 150 ohms is best 75 ohms is the minimum recommended Low capacitance between wires typically less than 20pF foot 60pF meter This may be accomplished by inner dielectrics of foamed type usually polypropylene or polyethylene having a low dielectric constant Alternatively the conductors may be spaced relatively far apart Lower impedance types have smaller cross sections and provide easier wiring for shorter total transmission distances Shield coverage of 95 or more Solid foil with an overlapped folded seam and drain wire is best Braided copper is less desirable spiral wound foil is least desirable An outer jacket that provides appropriate protection such as water oil or chemical resistance While PVC materials can be used in many installations Teflon polyethelene o
130. ad Configuration 2 Lalik 2 datagram 3 Configuration files for conventional Field Control modules can be read or written one module per L message However the configuration files of intelligent modules may exceed the 128 byte 4 maximum length of a Genius message Therefore any Write Configuration to an intelligent module must be contained within a Begin End Packet Sequence 5 i Read Configuration Data 6 Subfunction Code 02 hex pi 7 The Read Configuration Datagram is used to read configuration data The datagram format is Lb different for conventional Field Control modules or intelligent modules 8 Read Configuration Data Format for Field Control Conventional Modules Byte Description 0 Slot number 1 Length will return minimum 6 bytes to maximum 128 bytes or specific amount requested It can be more or less than the configured size for the slot If more data is requested than is available for a slot the extra data bytes will contain zeros Read Configuration Datagram Format for Field Control Intelligent Modules Configuration data for the BIU and other intelligent modules is transmitted in packets Depending on the module type there can be many packets Each packet can be up to 128 bytes long Byte Description 0 Slot number in bottom nibble Intelligent Packet in upper nibble Examples 01 hex reads packet 0 of intelligent module in
131. al input filter essentially is a band pass filter which looks at the half cycle timing Tp 2 and the duration above the thresholds Tw The limits are e Tp 2 0 6 Tp normal maximum e Tw 0 188 Tp normal minimum These measurements can be taken when evaluating the maximum length of an unspecified cable Dispersion is much less of a problem with fiber optic links since the media is much wider bandwidth and therefore has less distortion Propagation Delay The propagation delay is caused by travel time of the signal down the cable Typical signal velocity in data grade cables is around 65 78 of the speed of light This requires about 3 microseconds to travel a 2000 foot long bus This is about half a bit time at 153 6 Kb This skew could affect the bus access sequence since only one bit of quiet bus skip time is usually allocated between transmission of adjacent addresses Refer to Bus Access Time section below The signal must reach all devices on the bus within the period of one bit Propagation delay causes the ultimate limitation in bus length even with ideal media Propagation speed through fiber optic is not significantly different than wire and delays through the interfaces must be accounted for Serial Data Format The Genius protocol is designed to produce maximum throughput of data by using a minimum overhead of control and synchronizing characters Each character is 11 bits long comprising a start bit always 0 next a contr
132. alues ready you can continue to the next screen now and configure scaling at another time The Bus Interface Unit will use default scaling values of 1 1 if no scaling values are entered Indicates which of the 4 scaling values l E S1 Scale 1 01 you are currently Scaling or digital value 00000 Eng lo configuring Number of the lt gt entr channel you are now configuring 1 For EACH channel in turn enter scaling values in this order Low scaling value eng lo High scaling value eng hi Low digital value int lo High digital value int hi 2 If you press F2 gt the display goes from value to value in sequence If you press F1 lt the display goes to the first value for the previous channel 3 Use the HHM keypad to enter values To enter a negative value first enter the numbers then press the key 4 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections on this screen 5 Press F2 to go to the next screen Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Alarm Limits Each input channel can have two alarm thresholds one for a low engineering units scaled value and one for a high value Maximum values are 32 767 The high threshold should be greater than the low threshold Threshold limits are based on circuit scaling If scaling is changed review and readjust the Alarm Thresholds if necessary Alarm Thresholds can be set anywhere over the dynamic
133. an provide module and circuit diagnostics in the form of discrete input data This data can be automatically sent to the host and used by the host as needed The content of each type of intelligent module s diagnostic data is different Details are given in the module s datasheet This diagnostic information is separate from the fault table and fault clearing procedures used by the BIU and conventional I O modules The faults do not count in the total number of faults that can be stored by the BIU The host can clear an intelligent module s diagnostic bits using the module s discrete output bits These faults cannot be cleared using a Hand held Monitor or by sending a Clear Faults datagram GFK 0825F 6 1 s Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for the BIU and Conventional Modules The Bus Interface Unit reads faults from conventional modules in the I O station These faults can be viewed and cleared from a programmer fault table or from a Hand held Monitor The following table lists the fault messages generated by the Genius Bus Interface Unit for module and circuit faults on conventional I O modules BIU Level Faults Corrupted EEPROM Module Level Faults Unsupported Feature Calibration Memory Failure System Configuration Mismatch Fuse Blown Loss of I O Module Addition of I O Module Extra I O Module Loss of User Power Circuit Level Faults Analog Open Wire Analog High Alarm Analog Low Alarm Analog Over Range Analog Under Rang
134. and span values for a channel are entered during configuration rather than being set by a default range NONE is displayed on the Default Range screen NONE can then be selected again but will have no effect on the module configuration The module performs its own scaling unlike conventional Field Control analog modules whose scaling is performed by the BIU Custom Scaling To scale a channel choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value span and a corresponding engineering units value for each point During operation the module will use these values to convert engineering units into digital values that represent output current Engineering units values are 16 bit signed integers from 32 768 to 32 767 Span values are unsigned integers ranging from 0 to 20 000 The engineering and span points you select do not limit the actual hardware output range For example a channel whose range is configured to 1 will output current below 4mA for engineering units values below 4 000 even though the low span value is 4mA It is possible to choose scaling parameters that will cause the current output to be limited by the scaling process For example using a low engineering units value of 32 768 minimum value and a high engineering units value of 32 767 maximum value would effectively limit the output current to values between the corresponding low and high span values The first scaling screen shows the engineering units
135. appears S1 CH1 ACTIVE F2 y F1 S1 CH1 DEF RNG 1 Foy het S1 CH1 ENGL 10000 F2 y FA S1 CH1 ENG H 10000 F2 y ba S1 CH1 SPAN L 10000 F2 y Ft S1 CH1 SPAN H 10000 F2 y Mt Repeat for other channels F2 For HHM version 4 8 or above press F1 from Channel Active screen or Up Menu key to go to Channel Config screen GFK 0825F S 1 ALG310 1 0 del zoom Assign I O References for the Module When you zoom into the module s slot a screen like this appears Backplane Slot S 1 I I 024 100257 100280 Z lt gt Default BIU data type chg entr Default data length Next available reference This I O reference assignment screen shows the length and the next available reference address for each data type in BIU memory The 8 Point Analog Voltage Output Module is an intelligent module that uses more than one type of data up to 8 words of analog output data data type AQ on the Hand held Monitor E 0 3 bytes of discrete input data data type I for module and channel status Use of this data is optional E 0 2 bytes of discrete output data data type Q for clearing alarms Use of this data is optional The length is displayed in units that are appropriate for the data type analog output data is in words discrete inputs and outputs are in bits The asterisk indicates that the referenc
136. ars then press the F4 read key r S7 MFP1 0 lt gt del zoom Press F4 zoom The HHM displays the first MFP data type screen Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 99 Select Data Types for Micro Field Processor Data To configure BIU references for MFP data use the cursor F1 F2 keys to go through the available MFP data types On the example screen below the displayed MFP data type is Q discrete outputs If a data type has not been configured or if it has been configured with a length of zero the display indicates that it is not assigned Currently selected MFP data type Unassigned lt gt chg Note that data from the BIU to the Micro Field Processor s discrete output Q table will always start at Q00001 within the Micro Field Processor as shown on the HHM screen above MFPQ1 Similarly data from the Micro Field Processor discrete input I table to the BIU will always come from the MFP starting at 100001 which is indicated on the HHM as MFPI1 If you do not want any reference parameters for a Micro Field Processor if you are using Group Moves to transfer all data between the MFP and the BIU you must still configure at least one reference parameter with a length of zero The reference parameter configured with the zero length will show as unassigned To assign references to the presently displayed data type press the F3 change key the screen displays S 7 MFPQ1 CI Currently s
137. asterisk indicates that this reference has not yet been defined If the present selection is acceptable press F4 enter to accept it The asterisk will disappear If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping length or reference value press F3 change S 4 AI AI Select table tgl entr From this screen you can display the other BIU data types by pressing F3 toggle Press F4 enter when the desired data type is displayed S 4 AI AT 016 Select length clr entr If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type press F3 clear to clear the length field Enter the new length from the keypad If you enter an invalid length the HHM prompts BAD LENGTH ERR Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F After entering the correct length the offset starting reference screen appears The BIU automatically supplies the next available address in the selected table You can press F4 enter to accept this value or F3 clear then enter a new value from the keypad Press the F4 enter key after entering a new offset S 4 AI AI 016 Ref Addr 01896 lt gt clr entr The 16 Point Grouped Analog Input Module is an intelligent module which uses more than one type of data Use the F2 gt key to display the screen for the module s discrete input diagnostic data S 4 I I 088 I01817 01904 lt gt chg e
138. atinel Il numbers 16 I table 5 S 13 non standard TC 1 18 Q table 6 R 14 non standard TC 2 10 Al table 12 AQ table 20 21 Relative offset from start of table 50 51 Range type for input 1 This is used ONLY If range 22 23 Byte length of discrete diagnostic input data type eae pe y 1 195mV 5 312 5 mV 24 25 Memory type for the module s diagnostic input bits 2 39 mV 6 625 mV usually type I Enter one of the numbers listed 3 78 mV above 26 27 Relative offset from start of table 52 53 Remote J unction Compensation for input 1 28 29 Byte length of discrete control output data aie thermistor 2 use a value supplied in the module s 30 31 Memory type for the module s control output bits analog output AQ data usually type Q Enter one of the numbers listed 3 use the configured value bytes 58 59 above 32 33 Relative offset from start of table 54 55 Low Alarm for input 1 32767 to 32767 34 35 Byte length of analog output data for cold junction 56 57 High Alarm for input 1 32767 to 32767 compensation usually type AQ 36 37 Memory type for the module s analog output data 58 59 Remote J unction value for input 1 Used only if used for remote junction compensation Usually Remote J unction Compensation bytes 52 53 is type AQ Enter one of the numbers listed above 3 The module multiplies this value by 100 then 38 39 Relative ofset om start of tanle e o 40 41 Line Frequency 0 50 Hz 1 60 Hz 60 61 Offset for input
139. b in byte 36 60 61 output default value Isb in byte 60 Chapter 8 Datagrams Intelligent Modules Configuration Data Format Configuration files of intelligent modules may exceed the 128 byte maximum length of a Genius message Therefore any Write Configuration to an intelligent module must be contained within a Begin End Packet Sequence The BIU rejects any Write Configuration message for an intelligent module that does not follow a Begin Packet message Write Configuration for an intelligent module may be packetized by using the upper nibble of the slot byte to indicate a packet number Data for packets greater than zero is assumed to have an offset with a slot configuration of packet_number 128 Therefore all packets except the last must have 128 bytes Note that all reserved or unused bits must be 0 Configuration Data for Intelligent Modules Bytes 0 to 13 The first 13 bytes of configuration data for intelligent modules have the content shown below Each intelligent module has additional configuration data listed on the following pages Intelligent Analog Modules IC 670 Micro Field ALG240 ALG281 ALG282 ALG310 ALG330 ALG620 ALG630 Processor IC670MFP 100 intelligent module board ID reserved must be 0 ine moaueideniter 1 7 6 5 2 3 reference types word 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 it 0 1 means inputs available it 1 1 means outputs available h 1 means inputs and outputs availabl
140. ble errr pepr eip Tep eTe ania nana nine LFLR SEPE St 6 5 Senes Five or Series S1x PLUC orreina oee Eu lec cecedlvecnceddsecadedlssencedevsatatesevetioed 6 5 Contents vii Contents viii Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data ecssesssssssoocccccesssssocccsssse 7 1 5A AHL EN AN ee A E A A A A A 7 2 Forcing Circuits a e h aad AGAR MARA AAA MARR AAR AAR An Aa nai nei Panar NESS 7 2 Overriding 1 O Circuits sess ose cose ees tose Shes 0 kee Sdn oes ee AAA AR AAA AAA AA ee 7 2 Monitor Control I O Data Genius Hand held Monitor oo eeeeeeeessseeeeeesneeeeeesnaeees 7 3 Forcing Unforcing the Displayed Reference eeeeeeeeecccceeeeeeeeenneeececeeeeeeeennneeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 Monitor Control I O Data Series 90 PLC seeeseseeesesseessssresssrresssrrerssrressssreerssrresserre 7 6 Monitor Control I O Data Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC 7 6 Monitor Control I O Data Computer 20 0 0 ce eeeeeceeesneceeeessaceeeessaeeecessaeeecsesaeeseesaaeees 7 7 BETETE PANG RAAE A AA EE 8 1 Datagram Types sesasine eise es cevecctsceveccsecgvecetecetecestcetecestcoseede ei a 8 2 Read aY ke 1 o AAAA AA AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA 8 3 Read Map Reply iori nea eaa AE EE EA E EN EN EAE an ane ee A a N 8 3 Write MaD E a E a O OIT ITI pepe 8 4 Report Fault Datagram F rmate ooe eode neen een atte ttt tn o PET 8 5 Wontiguration Datas octet E A A AAA ES 8 7 Read Configuration Datas shan n a e a E E E E EE E a 8 7 Set Bus Interfa
141. bove to configure additional moves in the same group It is not necessary to configure moves that are not used a group can have 1 2 3 or 4 moves Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 105 5 106 Configure the Defaults for Each Move in a Group Next establish the defaults for each move in a Group This determines how the BIU responds if it loses communications with the module that is the source of the data The BIU continues performing the Group Data moves even if it is not able to read fresh data from the Source module If the source is slot 0 the BIU itself and the data type is discrete or analog output Q or AQ and that data is included within the BIU s I O map of data received from the network these determine what happens if network communications are lost On the next screen specify whether the BIU should set the data it transfers to all zeros or hold the data in its last valid states Make this selection for each move in the Group by moving the cursor under the selection for each move move of Group 1 in the example below Use the F3 toggle key to select either Y for Default to Zero or N for Hold Last State Move Deflt 1 1 YYYY lt gt tgl entr Press the F4 enter key then press F2 gt to go to the next configuration screen Specify the BIU Scanning Frequency for the Data Group An important characteristic of Group Data is that it does not need to be moved during each BIU sweep The last step in co
142. cations on the Genius Bus After a Bus Interface Unit completes a successful login with the host it begins sending input data on the bus and accepting output data from the bus The BIU communicates on the bus repetitively and asynchronously When the BIU receives the Genius bus communications token it sends the most recent data from the configured portion of its I and AI memories on the bus As mentioned these memories are repeatedly updated whenever the Bus Interface Unit scans the input modules in the station The Bus Interface Unit receives new outputs from the host when the host s bus controller has the communications token It places these outputs into the configured portion of its Q and AQ output tables These outputs are then passed to the devices in the station on the BIU s next I O scan Chapter 4 Operation 4 9 Input Data Sent by the Bus Interface Unit When the Bus Interface Unit takes its turn on the bus it sends one input data message containing the latest values for all configured discrete inputs followed by all configured analog inputs Because they are broadcast like all Genius inputs they can be obtained by any Bus Controller on the bus Input Data Message up to 128 bytes To CPU a Configured I Length m Configured Al Length m starting reference data Al starting reference data The data lengths are equal to the configured lengths of I and AI data selected for the Bus Interface Unit regardless of the host C
143. ce Unit Operating Mode esesseeseseeesesrresssrrerssrresssrreesessrreesssrrerssres 8 29 Set Micro Field Processor Operating Mode eeeesseeeeeesseesesrrerssrrerssrreesssrrerssrrerssrres 8 29 Intelligent Analog Module Recalibration Datagram eeesseseeeeererrerssrrrrrerrrerssrrerssres 8 30 Read T O FOrCES 5 075 cas cress T A EA T S 8 32 Read VO Forces Reply recien aae TE E EO EET EA TE TEE 8 32 Read Slot Diagnostics van pro r E ELEELE VELEL LEASE TAEAE TE ONETO p EEDE EE SEES TAPETE 8 33 Read Slot Diagnostics Reply eeseessseeeessreesssrerssrresssrrersssrterssrresssriesssrteersrreesssreeesseet 8 33 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D GFK 0825F Contents Scaling Analo Channels oe ceissgececeacscec uses vckksse tees cacauen cence deacuedsvevesseatecetecssiae A 1 How Scaling WOrKS c55 0 ccsscasseeessedeteceenaeeeseescbieeesseceecsossonacnevsecscnronectosrsbuebsetessensgerebesie A 1 Scaling Values for 1mV or 1uA Engineering Units BIU Version 1 3 00 eee A 2 Scaling Values for ImV or 1uA Engineering Units BIU oe eeeeeeeeeesreeeeenneeees A 3 Meastirme Scaling Valuesis i si tof sctetskesetetetebelebhliselabe the AA A 4 Example of Scaling an Analog Input eeeeeeeessceeceessseeecesseeeceesesaeeesessaeeeeeenaes A 5 Installing Additional Suppression ccccccsssssssssccccssssssssssssccccsssssssscc
144. ceees B 1 Suppression at the Power Limes ccccessecreeeesoereecerensoncerensensersesseseerenseneerenseasers B 1 Suppression for Devices in an Enclosure cecceeesseeceessneeeeessneeeceeseeeesesaeeesessaeeesees B 2 Suppression at the Communications Line eee eeesceccesssececeessaeeeeessneeecessaeeseesaeees B 2 The Genius Serial Bus scsssscicccs sees sccacccsucdscccssdteccedonnstdecdedsecesecdsesesvetesseduscnssesueste C 1 Wiring Guidelines iceietec defer ais E fens Ean Gace E AA e ea a ara PEE E o rana O ani C 1 Electrical Interface ni reter ena C 2 Genius Transceiver Electrical Specification ceeessceccessseeeeeesneeeesessaeeesesseeeseesaes C 3 Selecting a Cabl Type iu viel uBR GRUB Reels C 4 Serial Bus Waveforms ccccceeesseeceeessceceessececcesseeecessseeaeecsesaeeesessaeeesessaeeeeesaeees C 5 Using Other Cable Dypes 22i0 4 siesta tai eek ities Aes Nites Neate C 6 Serial Data Format eeso eae ee EESTI EE E Ea Oa ata etn ere es C 8 Bus ACCESS ie ite come E E e E e ett es ae AM EE EEEE C 9 Bus heneth EAEE E E EE E E E E E C 10 Baud Rate Sel OEO aea ska kona a a a a aa C 10 Bus Ambient Electrical Information eee eeesceeeesseeeecessneeeceesneeeceessaeeceesseeeseesaes C 11 Lightning Transient SUppressiOn se eeeeeeeeeesneeecessneeeceesnaeeeeessaeeeceesaeeseensaeeeeees C 11 Configuration Examples sssessscssssssoococcesesssssococcccessssooocccesesssssosocceeessssssoooee D 1 Example 1 Di
145. change any of the Bus Interface Unit configuration entries use the F1 lt key to return to the first Bus Interface Unit configuration screen E If you want to continue to the next configuration screen press the F2 gt key 5 14 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure Field Control Modules Display the Bus Interface Unit configuration menu F1 Genius Config F2 Module Config More From the Configuration Menu press F2 to configure the individual modules in the station Enable Disable the I O Scan On the next screen you can enable or disable the Bus Interface Unit s I O scanning The Bus Interface Unit begins scanning I O as soon as it is powered up Disabling the I O scan will leave inputs and outputs holding their last states IO Scan ENABLED Prv gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the present selection press F3 tgl 2 Press F4 entr If you want to go to the next screen without changing the selection press F2 gt Disable Network I O Updates GFK 0825F On this screen you can enable or disable I O updates between the BIU and the bus The BIU continues scanning the I O modules but does not exchange the data on the bus A Series 90 70 PLC will not report this condition as a Loss of Device However any alarm contacts in the Series 90 70 PLC that are assigned to the BIU will be set Network ENABLED lt gt
146. contain meaningful data they do add to the Genius bus scan time One circumstance under which it might be best to configure extra I O references would be to allow for future addition of I O modules to a station in a system where the host uses the same reference addresses for data as the BIU In such a system reserving extra references or leaving vacancies at configuration time can be a convenient way to prepare for future additions to a station In a system where the BIU s reference addresses are not used by the host changing the BIU s I O map does not affect the host so there is no need to configure unused references for future modules Input Data Message with Some Inputs Not Used unused unused am discrete inputs discrete analog inputs analog references references To CPU lt 4 Configured I Length 4 Configured Al Length gt starting reference data Al starting reference data Example An application has two stations in a system where the host uses the BIU reference addresses Station 1 Station 2 10001 10064 10065 10128 Al0001 Al0008 Al0009 Al0016 Q0001 Q0032 Q0033 Q0064 AQ0001 AQ0008 AQ0009 AQ0016 At a later time it becomes necessary to add a discrete input module to station 1 However in station 1 there are already enough input modules to use all of the assigned input references 10001 10064 Ideally the extra module would be added to station 1 at 100065 but that is already used as
147. ction Input voltage mV Data range 1 10000 to 10000 10000 to 10000 2 0 to 10000 0 to 10000 GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 53 Input Scaling The 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module performs its own scaling unlike conventional Field Control analog modules whose scaling is performed by the BIU Scaling can be used to define a linear relationship between a channel s input voltage in millivolts mV and the value in engineering units returned to the BIU The default scaling configuration provides values from 10 000 to 10 000 for an input voltage range of 10V low span value to 10V high span value To scale a channel choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value span and a corresponding engineering units value for each During operation the module will use these values to convert input voltages into digital values that represent engineering units Scaling does not increase the resolution of the data but it does transform the values returned to the BIU into more convenient units If the scaled data falls below the minimum for engineering units the module returns the minimum engineering units value 32767 If the scaled data rises above the maximum for engineering units the module returns the maximum engineering units value 32767 The illustration below shows the module s default scaling 15000 High Point 15000 15000 250 15000 I
148. cursor location 5 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections Module Fault Reporting On the next screen configure whether or not the Bus Interface Unit will report faults from this module to the network controller S1 Report Faults YES lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the current selection press F3 tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the entry Press F2 gt to return to the original slot configuration screen GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 25 5 26 Configure a Discrete Input Output Module S1 Mod Type Combo Disc 10 06 F4 Y S1 1 16 l S1 1 08 a as S1 110 Q 06 S1 Hid Lst State ro y AF F2 y Ary 100113 Q00033 F4 y I Foy FA S1 Report Faults YES A F2y FI NO S1 Ref Address Q00033 S1 Hid Lst State NO F2 F1 S1 Out Def Pt 01 000000xx F2 tr After you accept a module into the slot a screen like this appears S 1 I 16 Number of I references for this module tgl entr Assign I O References Specify the references to be used by the module For most applications you can simply have the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that memory type Alternatively you can enter specific references for the module a Ha DEES A To assign the next available references just press F4 entr B If you want to change to another type of I O table press F3 toggle
149. d F2 gt are used to scroll through channel specific configuration screens The following features are configured for each channel Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Channel Active When a channel is configured as Active it is scanned for data and checked for errors If a channel should not be scanned that channel can be configured as inactive An inactive input channel returns the value 0 S 4 CH 1 ACTIVE lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Input Range On this screen specify the range for the input There are four predetermined range and data scaling combinations selections 1 2 3 and 4 plus custom scaling S 4 CH1 DEF RNG 1 lt gt tgl entr The default is 1 Selections 1 or 2 will convert the full input current span down to 0 milliamps and produce negative values below 4 mA Selection 1 produces engineering unit data in microAmps These also enable an Open Wire diagnostic bit which is true whenever the input falls below the normal range Selection Input current uA Data range 1 4000 to 20000 4000 to 20000 2 4000 to 20000 0 to 32000 3 0 to 20000 0 to 32000 4 0 to 24000 0 to 32000 none Configurable scaling see below GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configu
150. d be a 1A 5x20mm 250VAC slow blow type Suitable fuses are Bussman GMC V 1A and Littelfuse 239 001 6 Reinstall the Bus Interface Unit on the BIU Terminal Block as described on the previous page GFK 0825F Chapter 3 Installation 3 15 Upgrading the BIU Firmware Note The BIU EEPROM stores the configuration of the I O Station If you replace the BIU EEPROM it will be necessary to reconfigure the I O Station using a Hand held Monitor Follow the steps below to replace the BIU s firmware EEPROM Avoid touching the exposed wiring on the Terminal Block when removing the Bus Interface Unit Caution Electrostatic discharge can damage the module when it is not installed on a Terminal Block Always observe normal ESD protection practices when handling an un installed module Use of a ground cuff and a grounded floor surface are recommended 1 Remove power to the I O Station 2 Fully loosen the retaining screws in the Bus Interface Unit and carefully remove it from the Terminal Block Do not tilt the module during removal 3 Remove the retaining screws from the BIU 4 The firmware EEPROM is located on the 2 board set that also includes the Hand held Monitor connector This set of two boards and their plastic card guide must be removed from the module housing 46546 p Remove 3 Y j 3 16 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 199
151. data if the BIU loses communications with the module Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero You can accept DEFAULT ZERO with the F4 enter key or press F3 toggle then F4 enter to change to DEFAULT HOLD and save it S 2 Module gt I DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr S 2 Module gt I DEFAULT HOLD lt gt tgl entr S 2 Module gt AI DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr For data going to the module type Q which is included within the BIU s I O map you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network S 2 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr 5 58 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure Filtering Next select the filtering delay to eliminate noise due to the AC power lines Filtering increases the response time to changes in a channel The choices for filtering are A None The module returns the most recent sample of the input B 10 ms The module averages the most recent 8 samples of the input B 20 ms The module averages the most recent 16 samples of the input The module will perform filtering on all inputs on the module that are configured as active S 2 FILTERING 20MS lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 tgl 2
152. data types by pressing F3 toggle Press F4 enter when the desired data type is displayed S 4 AI AI 008 Select length clr entr If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type press F3 clear to clear the length field Enter the new length from the keypad If you enter an invalid length the HHM prompts BAD LENGTH ERR After entering the correct length the offset starting reference screen appears The BIU automatically supplies the next available address in the selected table GFK 0825F GFK 0825F You can press F4 enter to accept this value or F3 clear then enter a new value from the keypad Press the F4 enter key after entering a new offset S 4 AT AI 008 Ref Addr 01896 clr entr Use the F2 gt key to display the screen for the module s discrete input diagnostic data 8 4 I 1 048 101801 01848 lt gt chg entr You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 enter key After you press the Enter key the asterisk disappears to show that the current values have been saved Next go to the screen that shows the module s Q references which are for fault clearing S 4 Q 9 016 Q01801 01816 lt gt chg entr You can also edit this screen Use the F4 enter key to save the selections and continue to the next item The next screen displays the AQ reference for the module You can edit the address and length This one word
153. dresses The BIU s network map defines the BIU memory locations of the data that is exchanged on the bus It provides no information about the T O assignments of individual I O modules in the station However the checksums indicate that the overall configuration remains unchanged Byte No Byte Description 0 Not used 1 Starting reference for discrete input data LSB 2 Starting reference for discrete input data MSB 3 Length of discrete input data in bytes 4 5 Starting reference of analog input Al data 6 Length of analog input Al data in bytes 7 8 Starting reference of discrete output Q data 9 Length of discrete output Q data in bytes 10 11 Starting reference of analog output AQ data 12 Length of analog output AQ data in bytes 13 8 bit Additive Checksum Unused 14 15 16 bit LRC Critical Checksum Isb in 14 msb in 15 READ ONLY 16 Field Control 8 bit Additive Checksum Unused 17 18 Field Control 16 bit CRC Non Critical Checksum Isb in 17 msb in 18 READ ONLY Starting references in I AI Q and AQ memory are returned For each memory type a data length is also supplied If a length is zero the associated starting reference can be ignored it is not meaningful GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 3 Write Map Subfunction Code 2C hex This datagram allows a CPU to change a previously configured or unconfigured BIU network map addresses if configuration is not currently pro
154. during certain sweeps makes it possible to shorten the BIU s overall sweep time Upto 16 groups can be set up for an I O station A group contains data from only one module to only one module Either module may be an I O module a Micro Field Processor or the Bus Interface Unit Field Control Station Bus Interface Unit Micro Field Processor l ee l Q Q Al Al AQ lt AQ Intelligent I O Module l Group Data is Q Transferred Al During Selected AQ Sweeps Only A group can consist of a combination of I Q AI and or AQ data E For each data type a starting offset and length can be specified It is not necessary to move all of a module s data E The data does not need to be moved during each BIU sweep Selective Sweep For group data only the BIU can move the data on each sweep or on any combination of up to 16 sweeps The selection of sweeps is easily made when configuring the group Examples Appendix D includes examples of how data might be configured for group moves Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F The BIU Sweep 10 11 12 46543 Read all inputs from conventional discrete and analog input modules Read all reference parameter inputs from smart modules y Read all group data moves whose dest
155. dwidth of wire media which causes the various frequency components of a pulse waveform to travel at different speeds and thus arrive separately in time called dispersion As a result the received pulse appears rounded and distorted The signal at the extreme end from the transmitter may look rounded and skewed as shown below Distortion is most apparent near the beginning and end of a pulse train where in may appear as a change in phase or a frequency shift Critical timing for a logic 0 transmission is shown below in a more detailed version of the waveform ec TW eT ae I Tpi2oe Thi2y Note the first and last half cycle look wider The most critical to operation is the first full cycle of the first start bit of the transmission Detection of this pulse establishes the time synchronization of the receiver to the incoming waveform Missing this first pulse does not cause the data to be missed but may compromise the noise immunity with respect to extra or missing pulses The frequency of the AC pulse is 3X the baud rate as noted earlier This means the normal period Tp normal is e 2 17 microseconds at 153 6 Kb e 4 34 microseconds at 76 8 Kb e 8 68 microseconds at 38 4 Kb Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus C 7 C 8 The half cycle pulse width when measured between the positive and negative receiver thresholds denoted as Tp 2 in the figure will vary along the waveform due to dispersion and resembles a frequency shift The digit
156. e In addition to module and circuit faults the Bus Interface Unit itself provides the following diagnostics to the host Serial Bus Address conflict Loss of communications Loss of controllers EPROM fault RAM fault Processor fault Maximum Number of Uncleared Faults The Bus Interface Unit can store up to 32 uncleared faults at one time in its internal fault table The same internal table is used for faults from I O modules and Bus Interface Unit faults As faults occur the first 16 are saved in the internal table They stay there until the faults are cleared none of these 16 faults will be lost if the table overflows However for faults 17 through 32 the internal fault table operates as a First In First Out stack When fault 33 occurs fault 17 is dropped from the table Fault 1 Fault 16 Fault 17 5 Faults overflow here T Fault 32 q New faults are added here 6 2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F L Display and Clear Faults from a Genius Hand held Monitor A Genius Hand held Monitor can display faults from a Bus Interface Unit while attached anywhere on the Genius bus 1 From the HHM Main Menu shown below display the HHM s special set of menus for the Bus Interface Unit F1 HHM UTILITIES F2 ANALYZE F3 CONFIGURATION F4 DEVICE MEMORY A Ifthe Bus Interface Unit is the currently selected device press either F3 Configuration
157. e a5 reserved must be 0 6 5 12 89 reserved must be 0 10 11 reserved must be 0 input output hold last state default to 0 Bits are shown below For each 0 default 1 hold last state 7 e 5 4 3 2 ft L BSM State read only BSM Present 1 yes 0 no BSM Controller 1 yes 0 no L BSM Forced 1 yes 0 no CPU Redundancy 00 no redundancy 01 Hot standby 10 Duplex 11 reserved Duplex Default Configuration Protection read only reserved must be 0 additional module data Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Additional Configuration Data for a 16 Point Grouped Analog Input Module ALG240 The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 261 for a 16 Point Grouped Analog Input module IC670ALG240 is listed below See the previous page for the content of bytes 0 to 13 Byte Description Byte Description 14 umber of input reference parameters 2 40 41 Ch1 Low Span 0 to 25000 15 umber of output reference parameters 1 42 43 Ch1 High Span 0 to 25000 16 17 Byte length of analog input data default is 32 44 45 her Eng Units 32768 to 18 19 emory ype for the module s analog input 46 47 Ch 1 High Eng Units 32768 to data usually type Al Enter one of the 182767 following numbers 16 I table 18 Q table 10 Al table 12 AQ table 20 21 Relative
158. e below shows the scan time contribution at each baud rate for stations with a total of 16 32 64 128 and 256 bytes when the Bus Interface Unit receives outputs from only one bus controller at a time To find the exact scan time contribution for a station follow the procedure below Total Amount of Input and Contribution time in mS at each baud rate Output Data for std ext 16 bytes 2 09 2 16 3 83 7 16 32 bytes 3 24 3 31 6 12 11 74 64 bytes 5 52 5 60 10 69 20 89 128 bytes 10 10 10 17 19 85 39 20 256 bytes fully loaded 19 25 19 32 38 15 75 80 Procedure for Estimating Bus Scan Time for a Field Control Station 1 Find the total number of input bytes and output bytes Each analog channels is 2 bytes Eight discrete points are one byte number of input bytes number of output bytes total bytes 2 With this total calculate a scan time contribution using the formula below that corresponds to the Genius bus baud rate Formula for 153 6 Kbaud Standard 0 943mS 0 0715 x total bytes mS Formula for 153 6 Kbaud Extended 1 015mS 0 0715 x total bytes mS Formula for 76 8 Kbaud 1 538mS 0 143 x total bytes mS Formula for 38 4 Kbaud 2 583mS 0 286 x total bytes mS Other devices on the bus including the Bus Controller Hand held Monitor and I O blocks also add to the bus scan time The Genius I O System Manual Volume 1 shows how to calculate overall bus scan time for all o
159. e has not yet been defined The first screen shows references for discrete input I diagnostic data You can display the other BIU data types by pressing F3 toggle Press F4 enter when the desired data type is displayed If the starting reference and length for the data type are acceptable press F4 enter to accept them The asterisk will disappear Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 81 5 82 If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping length or reference value press F3 change Then press F3 to select a data table data type S 1 I I Select table tgl entr To configure the selected data type press F4 entr You can edit the length on this screen S 1 I I 024 Select length clr entr Enter the new length from the keypad Valid values are 0 8 16 or 24 bits for discrete input data type I data 0 8 or 16 bits for discrete output data type Q data up to 8 words for analog output data type AQ data If you enter a length of zero the HHM displays Unassigned for that data type If you enter an invalid length the HHM prompts BAD LENGTH ERR Data must be contained within byte boundaries entries for length and reference address are automatically adjusted if needed Lengths are adjusted down and reference addresses are adjusted down For example a length of 18 would be decreased to 16 and a starting address of 5 would be decreased to 1 After entering a valid length the offset
160. e many sources including Clare General Instruments and Motorola For information about this product in the US contact Lucas Industries Incorporated 5500 New King Street Troy Michigan 48098 tel 313 879 1920 fax 313 552 1020 Spark gaps are available from Clare Refer to the vendor s literature for installation details In extreme situations such as totally isolated power systems additional protection against lightning damage should be provided by adding surge suppressors for groups of I O blocks Such suppressors should be installed from incoming power leads to ground enclosure baseplate block case where leads enter the enclosure A device specifically designed to protect the Genius bus is available from CONTROL TECHNOLOGY 835 Hwy 90 Hancock Square Suite 10 P O Box 2908 Bay Saint Louis MS 39520 tel 601 466 4550 fax 601 466 4553 Contact them for application information The devide must be used in combination with power line suppression to fully protect the system GFK 0825F Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus C 11 Appendix Configuration Examples D This appendix includes examples of different Field Control I O Station configurations An I O Station with discrete data only where all of the data is configured within the BIU s I O map The BIU sends all inputs from Field Control modules on the network All outputs are generated by the system controller for example a PLC that sends them to the BIU over the network An
161. e module s discrete output bits which can be used by the host for clearing faults Valid lengths for this data type are 0 16 The data must lie on byte boundaries entered lengths and reference addresses are automatically adjusted if necessary S 1 0 0 016 0Q01817 01832 lt gt chg entr Edit the reference address and length if needed Press F4 enter to save the selections Entries must be made for data types I Q and AQ If you do not want to use one of these data types give it a length of zero If you back out before all data types have been configured the HHM displays the following screen Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you exit the I O configuration choices are not saved The BIU will not send commands to the module until all three data types I Q and AQ have been configured Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 83 5 84 Configure Data Defaults Data default screens are displayed next For the module s diagnostic input bits data type I you can determine what the BIU should do with the data if the BIU loses communications with the module Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero S 1 Module gt I DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr You can accept DEFAULT ZERO with the F4 enter key or press F3 toggle then F4 enter to change the default and save it S 1 Module gt I DEFAULT HOLD lt gt tgl entr For the
162. e places the data into the input table segment that corresponds to the serial bus address Device Number of the Bus Interface Unit 4 10 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Outputs from the Host to the BIU Each time the host s Bus Controller has the bus communications token it sends any outputs it has received from the CPU to the devices on the bus Outputs for the Bus Interface Unit are sent in one output data message with all configured discrete outputs followed by all configured analog outputs Output Data Message up to 128 bytes a discrete outputs analog outputs To Station Configured Q Length m Configured AQ Length m Q starting reference data AQ starting reference data The data lengths are equal to the configured lengths of Q and AQ data selected for the Bus Interface Unit regardless of the host CPU type or the actual amount of output data needed for the modules physically present in the station Either length may be zero Output Data Format The output data format shown above is required by the BIU When generating the output data message a Series 90 70 Bus Controller automatically places the Q data ahead of the AQ data Other types of host must send an output message consisting of the correct number of bytes of discrete output data followed by the correct number of bytes of analog output data As soon as new output data is received the Bus Interface Unit ch
163. e to move data from one memory type in the BIU to another memory type in this manner Note the following about Group Moves 1 Ifa Group Move involves an intelligent module the module must be present to configure the Group Move 2 Ifa Group Move has been configured with an intelligent module involved and the intelligent module is then deleted from the configuration the Group Move containing that module is automatically deleted 3 The individual moves within a Group Move are not done by the BIU in sequential order For example two Group Moves would be needed to make the following moves sequentially Slot 0 the BIU to Slot 0 the BIU 100001 to Q00001 length 2 Q00001 to 100017 length 2 The BIU would not move the contents of 100001 100016 into Q00001 Q00016 then move the same data out of Q00001 Q00016 into 100017 100032 Both the device being read from and the device being written to are identified by specifying their slot number location in the I O Station as part of the group configuration On the screen shown above enter the slot number of the module 0 for the BIU to 8 for any other module that will be the source of the data Press the F4 enter key to accept the slot Press F2 gt to go to the next configuration screen Next enter the slot number of the module 0 for the BIU 1 to 8 for another module that will receive the Group Data For example Group Move 1 0 Dest Slot 7 lt gt
164. each channel to correspond to the signal level of the input device Note that Current Source Analog Input Module IC670ALG230 and Current Source Analog Output Module IC670ALG320 cannot be used with negative voltages 0 to 20mA for current modules 4 to 20 mA 7 Number of the S1 Range Ch 01 channel you are Oma 20mA now configuring lt gt tgl entr 1 For each channel use the F3 tgl key to select a range 2 Use the Fl lt and F2 gt keys to select channels 3 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections on this screen 4 Press F2 to go to the next screen Note Range Selection is a setup parameter it is not ordinarily changed while the module is operating GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 31 5 32 Input Scaling Based on the actual analog input signal level for a channel the analog input module reports a value from decimal 0 to 4095 to the Bus Interface Unit The Bus Interface Unit can convert this digital input to a value that is more meaningful to the application by using the scaling values configured on this screen For each channel two sets of values are configured high and low scaled values and the actual high and low digital values they represent Based on these two pairs of values the Bus Interface Unit will be able to scale values for all other input levels See Appendix A for information on finding appropriate scaling values for your application If you don t have scaling v
165. ecks it to be sure the data is error free and of the correct length The length must match the combined lengths of the discrete output data and analog output data that have been configured for the Bus Interface Unit s network I O map After verifying the accuracy of the data the Bus Interface Unit puts the data in its Q and Q tables and begins passing it to the output modules in the station Each discrete output module receives one byte of data for each eight circuits Each analog output module receives two bytes one word for each analog channel Output Defaults On powerup all outputs go to their programmed default state except outputs which had previously been forced they go immediately to their forced state or value If CPU communications are lost for 3 bus scans all outputs that are not presently forced will either default or hold their last state as configured Conventional I O modules can have a configured output default value Intelligent modules default outputs are always zero GFK 0825F Chapter 4 Operation 4 11 Genius Bus Scan Time 4 12 The Genius bus scan time is dependent on the number of devices and amount of data traffic on the bus The bus scan time may vary from 3 400mS but 20 30mS is typical Bus Controllers impose a minimum Genius bus scan time of 3mS Therefore Genius bus scan time can never be less than 3mS The Genius bus scan time contribution for Field Control station depends on its I O data usage The tabl
166. ed BIU sweeps 4 16 Overview of Synchronous Operation The following diagram and table show how data is handled during synchronous operation BIU 1 Inputs Conventional Tables Input Module l 2 All inputs m Discrete B Inputs 3 Groups ee 3 A 4 Al l l e 6 to m Analog 4 Groups network Inputs j 5 All outputs Micro Sina Network Q 8 All inputs Field Module gt lt oase 9 Groups Processor 7 from network Outputs AQ 10 Outputs i gt Analog Conventional Outputs Output Module 11 All outputs gt 12 Groups 12 pe E Sweep Action Forces if No Network Cannot Read Step mapped Module 1 Inputs from conventional modules yes defaults 2 All inputs from intelligent modules yes defaults 3 Groups not from MFP to BIU tables yes defaults 4 Groups to MFP yes 5 All outputs to MFP starts solution 6 Move to network n a n a 7 Move from network yes n a n a 8 All inputs from MFP gets solution yes defaults 9 Groups from MFP to BIU tables yes defaults 10 Outputs to conventional modules defaults at step 7 11 All outputs to intelligent modules defaults at step 7 12 Groups to intelligent modules defaults at step 7 defaults 13 Data displayed on HHM Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s
167. ed to both Bus A and Bus B and is configured as a bus switching device The Bus Interface Unit on the right which serves non critical I O modules is connected to Bus A only and is not configured as a bus switching device Bus A 46473 Bus B Chapter I Introduction I 11 1 12 A Bus Interface Unit can be located on a bus stub A Bus Interface Unit can also be located on a bus stub which is a short length of unterminated cable downstream of either a Genius I O block Bus Switching Module combination or a Remote I O Scanner connected to a dual bus Because the bus stub cable itself is not redundant this type of installation does not provide as much protection as connecting directly to a dual bus The bus switching device to which the bus stub is connected can be another Genius block with a Bus Switching Module attached as shown below or a Series 90 70 Remote I O Scanner In this example there are two Field Control stations installed on a bus stub Each is configured as BSM Present but not configured as a BSM Controller Bus A 46474 Bus B o Wr A I Switching Lol L Module Jy Genius Block a Up to 7 Additional Devices on the Bus Stub Up to seven devices not counting the BSM block or Remote I O Scanner to wh
168. eeeseeeeeenaes 5 35 Configure a 16 Point Grouped Analog Input Module 0 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeessseeeeeesseeeeeeeaes 5 40 Configure an 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 48 Configure a 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 56 Circuit Configuration ek ie ea he VEE tania petal eae EE 5 60 Configure an RTD Input Module 0 0 cece cess ceeeeceseseseseeeseseesesaseseeseneaees 5 64 Circuit Conlisurationt 2 2a nda saan data GA kAadnwAadndn ein cade cata daa 5 67 Configuring a Thermocouple Input Module ce eeeeeeesssececeesneeeeesneeeeessneeeeeenaes 5 72 Configure an 8 Point Analog Voltage Output Module ee eeeeeeessseeeeeesseeeeeenaes 5 81 Configure an 8 Point Analog Current Output Module 000 eee eeeeeeeeesseeeeeesneeeeeeeaes 5 90 Configure a Micro Field Processor cnsnnach tie dent pn ree peeta e pE titan 5 99 Diagnostics and Fault Clearing ssscccsscsssscssscssscccsscsseccssscssesssssseeseee 6 1 Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for Intelligent Modules eee eeeeeeesseeeeeesneeeeeeeees 6 1 Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for the BIU and Conventional Modules 0 ee 6 2 Display and Clear Faults from a Genius Hand held Monitor cece eeseeeeeeeeees 6 3 Display and Clear Faults from a PLC eee cee eeere cess eceseseneeeceeaseseeseneeeee 6 5 Series IO PEC VO Fault Table ission dni mn sah A oE T sees 6 5 series 90 PEC PEC Fault Ta
169. elected table Select table in BIU lt gt chg entr The upper right corner of the screen shows the BIU table type for the data On the screen above it is the discrete input I table Normally the same data type is used in both the MFP and the BIU Use the F3 change key to choose the correct BIU table type The HHM then requests a length for that data type This is the amount of data of the selected type that will be exchanged with the BIU S 7 MFPQ1 Q 000 Select length lt gt chg entr 5 100 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Enter the data length from the keypad then press F4 enter to save it The HHM displays the offset reference address of the first reference of the selected type that is available in the BIU For example if Q00001 through Q00032 were already assigned to other modules the next available reference would be Q00033 S 7 MFPQ1l Q 016 Ref Addr 00033 lt gt chg entr If you enter an invalid length value or overlapping references the HHM displays an error message If that happens press the HHM Clear key and make a new entry If you enter a number that is not on a byte boundary for discrete data the BIU will round down to the nearest correct offset Select other MFP data types and specify BIU data types and references Assign Data Defaults Next set the default for each configured type of BIU data unassigned data ty
170. ences for conventional modules to their default hold last state conditions then forces them For any intelligent module set up for defaults the BIU sets output table references to their forced state or value or to zero 8 Move Reference Parameters from a Synchronization Module to the BIU If a module has been configured as a Synchronization module the BIU next moves all configured reference parameter data from the module to the BIU s internal memory tables then applies any forces If the Synchronization module is busy the BIU waits then retries If the BIU is unable to move the data after five seconds it sets its own corresponding memory locations to zero or holds its last states as configured for the Synchronization module 9 Move Group Data from Synchronization Module to BIU If a module has been configured as a Synchronization module the BIU moves all its defined group data to the BIU s internal tables then applies any forces If the BIU is unable to read the specified data it generates a fault report and defaults the data to 0 or holds its last states depending on the module s configuration If any of the data items are presently forced those forces are retained 10 Send Outputs to Conventional Modules The BIU next sends output data to conventional output modules in the I O station Discrete output modules automatically echo the received outputs back to the BIU If a module fails to echo its outputs the BIU generates a fault report
171. ength as shown in the following tables 7 133 data See below Message Content for Calibrating Low End of Channel Byte Value Description 0 Reserved Channel Channel to be calibrated 0 15 0 Request to calibrate low end 10 11 Current in microAmps Recommended range is 3500 to 4500 microAmps 12 13 0 65535 Number of readings to average 14 20 0 Reserved Message Content for Calibrating High End of Channel Byte Value Description 7 0 Reserved Channel Channel to be calibrated 0 15 1 Request to calibrate high end 10 11 Current in microAmps Recommended range is 19500 to 20500 microAmps 12 13 0 65535 Number of readings to average 14 20 0 Reserved Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Field Recalibration The 16 Point Grouped Analog Input module is calibrated at the factory It can also be recalibrated from the host to adapt to different conditions Calibration data consists of two sets of values for each channel One value is provided to the module during calibration The other value is a corresponding A D sample value for that current that is determined by the module One pair of values represents a low value typically 4mA and the other represents a high value typically 20mA Recalibration if needed is done as described below 1 Connect a known current to each of the channels
172. ength is between 3500 and 4500 feet select 76 8 Kbaud 5 If cable length is between 2000 and 3500 feet select 153 6 Kbaud extended 6 If the cable length is less than 2000 feet either 153 6 Kbaud standard or 153 6 Kbaud extended can be used The products are set to operate at 153 6 Kbaud standard when shipped from the factory The use of 153 6 Kbaud extended is recommended especially if the system will include a dual bus with Bus Switching Modules In noisy environments 153 6 Kbaud extended provides improved noise immunity with little effect on bus scan time If a system is experiencing excessive blinking of the bus controller s COMM OK light or if the I O blocks I O Enabled LEDs go off frequently 153 6 Kbaud extended should be used The baud rate selected should be indicated on all blocks especially if different busses in the facility use different baud rates Before connecting a Hand held Monitor to a functioning bus check that it has been configured to the correct baud rate If not change the HHM baud rate selection turn off the HHM connect it to the bus then turn the HHM on Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Bus Ambient Electrical Information Most capacitively and magnetically coupled noise shows up as common mode voltage on the bus The bus provides a 60 dB common mode rejection ratio A noise spike above 1000 volts would be required to corrupt the data The bus receivers
173. eps 5 22 default hold last state 5 23 fault reporting 5 23 Discrete inputs 4 10 Discrete Output Module configuration format for datag ram 8 12 8 13 configuration steps 5 24 5 26 default hold last state fault reporting T O references Discrete outputs Display and clear faults from LM90 70 6 5 Duplex CPU redundancy 1 10 5 12 E EEPROM remove and replace 3 16 Enclosures Equipment required with Field Control 1 9 ESD protection 3 2 F Fault Report datagram 8 5 Fault Reporting Analog input module Analog output module configuration configuring for the Bus Interface Unit 5 10 Discrete output module 5 25 5 27 Faults clearing 6 3 display with Logicmaster 90 70 handling by Field Processor 6 2 Features Fiber optics Filtering configuring for Grouped Analog Input module Firmware upgrade 3 16 Forcing I O data Functional specifications Fuse BIU 2 1 3 15 replacing 3 15 G Genius Field Processor GFK 0825F Index configuration format for datagram 8 10 8 27 Analog input module 5 29 Genius systems with Field Control 1 7 Analog Voltage Output module 5 81 Groundin g C 11 discrete input module 5 22 BIU Terminal Block 3 9 discrete output module 5 24 system for analog output module Group Data Micro Field Processor s internal 4 14 BIU reads from other modules RTD module 5 64 Group Data moves 4 4 Thermocouple module 5 72 Group Dat
174. er fault reporting is enabled the Bus Interface Unit detects faults on the circuit and takes appropriate action If a fault occurs the fault condition must be corrected for proper operation of the I O module Number of the channel S1 Faults Ch 01 at the cursor location YYYYYYYY lt gt tgl entr 1 For each channel select Y if the Bus Interface Unit should report module faults to the network controller for that channel Select N if it should not 2 Use the F1 lt and F2 gt keys to select channels 3 Use the F3 toggle to change the selection at the present cursor location 4 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections on this screen 5 Press F2 to go to the next screen Channel Active When a channel is configured as Active it is scanned for data and checked for errors If a channel should not be scanned that channel can be configured as inactive An inactive input channel returns no faults and no data Number of the channel S1 Active Ch 01 at the cursor location YYYYYYYY lt gt tgl entr 1 For each channel select Y if the channel should be active Select N if it should not 2 Use the F1 lt and F2 gt keys to select channels 3 Use the F4 entr key to save the selections on this screen 4 Press F2 to go to the next screen 5 30 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Input Current Ranges Select a current range for
175. erences for the Module When you zoom into the module s slot a screen like this appears S 2 AI AT 016 See Default data length Default BIU data type Next available reference lt gt chg entr This screen shows the default table and length and the next available reference address in that table for that reference parameter The length is displayed in units that are appropriate for that data type AI and AQ are in words Q and I are in bits The asterisk indicates that this reference has not yet been defined If the present selection is acceptable press F4 enter to accept it The asterisk will disappear If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping length or reference value press F3 change S 2 AI AI Select table tgl entr From this screen you can display the other BIU data types by pressing F3 toggle Press F4 enter when the desired data type is displayed S 2 AI AI 016 Select length clr entr If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type press F3 clear to clear the length field Enter the new length from the keypad If you enter an invalid length the HHM prompts BAD LENGTH ERR GFK 0825F GFK 0825F After entering the correct length the offset starting reference screen appears The BIU automatically supplies the next available address in the selected table You can press F4 enter to accept this value or F3 clear the
176. es Five PLC an I O or register reference address must be assigned to the Bus Interface Unit This is done on the screen shown below Stat Tbl Addr 00000 lt gt IO6 entr shows reference type 1 The F3 key toggles the selection of Series Six I O memory Series Five I O memory or register memory If I O memory is used the amount required is equal to the number of bits of discrete data PLUS analog data Each analog reference used consumes 16 points Data is stored beginning at the assigned I O reference In the Input Table the sequence is discrete inputs then analog inputs In the Output Table the sequence is discrete outputs then analog outputs This is illustrated in chapter 3 If register memory is used an amount is required that is equal to the total number of bytes of input data PLUS all of the output data Data is stored beginning at the assigned register reference The sequence is discrete inputs then analog inputs then discrete outputs and analog outputs last See chapter 3 for more information 2 Key in the number of the block s beginning I O or register reference This may be Series Six I O 1 to 993 Series Five I O 1 to 2041 Registers 1 to 16383 or upper limit of CPU which may be less 3 Press the F4 Entr key GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 9 Configure Fault Reporting On the next screen select whether or not the Bus Interface Unit will perform any fault reporting
177. ete analog and 128 bytes of outputs discrete analog The lengths selected should include all the I O data that will be exchanged on the bus If a data length is too short modules that overflow the configured limit will not be serviced by the main CPU system 5 After entering the length for AQ data the fourth data type press F1 gt If you changed any starting address or length entries the HHM displays this screen Map has changed Accept no yes 6 To accept the changes and continue to the next menu press F4 yes GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 19 5 20 Add Modules and Assign References BIU The steps for configuring an I O module depend on whether or not the 0 module is present at the time of configuration Intelligent modules see the list below must be present to be configured conventional I O modules do oo not have to be present 1 Slot Number refers to the location of the module in the station relative to Hl Tl 2 the Bus Interface Unit See the illustration at left IB ena If the slot has not already been configured after configuring the I O map the 3 HHM displays A 4 S 1 Empty 5 6 lt gt tgl read E y If the slot has previously been configured the HHM shows the existing I TT 8 configuration For example
178. etwork 1 153 6k lt lt NABIED F2 y 10001 0 B F1 First 16 Flts F4 y Fi Group Move 1 0 F2 Last 16 Flts F2 Dest Slot 7 s are hex F3 Previous Menu Stat Thl Addr fn a ba F1 5 _0001 Bik Map Start F2 y F1 100001 lt 2 Se change data type F2 y Group Move 1 1 force Report Faults F2 Fi Lore Ref 26A10009 h ffset ES f F2 t change offset F1 F2 E Bik Map Lngth y change I O type F2 y et Group Move 1 1 eon Fault 01 BSM Present FA Des Ref R00002 bateti NO i F2 oy F1 k1 Start Length for Q F2 y Group Move 1 1 Start Length for Al a BSM Controller g Byte ten ng J NO Start Length for AQ y 1 F1 F2 y F2 Source and Dest Slot amp Ref U ERTE for Moves 2 3 4 in Group CPU Redundancy Map has changed A Hot StbyMode Accept F2 y F1 F2 y j F Move Deflt YYY CONFIG PROTECT Disable F2 moves cursor F2 y 1 ia P thi h modules Specific Hand held Monitor versions rz F1 rough macuies weep Enab may have different menus from TagName NNNNNNNNNNN key j those shown here TEMP F2 F4 slot not slot previouslv configured configured S1 Empty F2 S1 Q 16 F2 Q01785 Q01800 F4 read Fi gt Individual Module Sl ModTye L Confiauration Discrete Out 16 Screens Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Change the Serial Bus Address of the Bus Interface Unit For a new BIU the Serial Bus Address is assigned on the Program Block ID screen as described
179. example illustrated above the Bus Interface Unit assigns 16 references beginning at 100001 to a 16 point input module In the same system the next discrete input module in the station would automatically be assigned references beginning at 100017 To edit the module s configuration press F4 zoom Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Module Fault Reporting After zooming in from the reference address configuration screen configure whether or not the Bus Interface Unit will report faults from the module to the network controller S1 Report Faults YES prv gt tgl entr Use the F1 previous key if you want to return to the previous screen 1 If you want to change the current selection press F3 tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 to go to the next screen Default Inputs or Hold Last State Next configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the BIU internal table if it stops receiving actual input data from the module S1 Hld Lst State NO lt gt tgl entr 1 Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold inputs in their last states and supply that data to the BIU internal table Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module s inputs to 0 and supply that data to the BIU internal table instead 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to return
180. ext the Output Default Time screen appears Out Def Time 2 5 sec lt gt tgl entr 4 If the total bus scan time is expected to exceed 100mS set the Output Default Time to 10 seconds The Output Default Time is normally 2 5 seconds If the Bus Interface Unit stops receiving outputs from the Bus Controller it will wait for this specified time period before defaulting outputs in the station If you want to go to the next screen without making a change press F2 gt If the selection should be changed press F3 tgl 5 Press F4 entr GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 11 5 12 Configure CPU Redundancy If the Bus Interface Unit will be used on the same bus with two controllers PLCs or network controller computers and both of the controllers will send it outputs the Bus Interface Unit must be set up for CPU Redundancy The two types of CPU Redundancy Hot Standby and Duplex are defined below If either type of redundancy is selected the Bus Interface Unit will automatically provide inputs and diagnostics to both of the redundant CPUs If the station contains any analog modules the only form of CPU redundancy permitted is Hot Standby The Hand held Monitor will permit selection of either type of CPU redundancy Do not select Duplex if there are any analog modules in the station CPU Redundancy No Cntl Redund lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to go to the next screen without making
181. f the devices on a bus Remember that the Genius bus scan time can never be less than the 3mS minimum enforced by the bus controller Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Throughput If an output in the station is tied to an input in the same station the output changes state or value in the case of an analog output module within a few milliseconds of the new output being sent from the bus controller to the Bus Interface Unit To guarantee that an output changes state that state must be present for at least one BIU sweep time or bus scan time whichever is greater The input which is tied to the output responds as soon as any load effects have settled out and input filtering is completed This may occur as soon as the Bus Interface Unit s next I O scan If the host is a PLC an input must be present for at least one PLC sweep time plus one Genius bus scan time plus one BIU sweep time to guarantee its detection by the PLC If the input changes state only briefly and then changes again before the input data is sent on the bus the interim state may be overwritten in the Bus Interface Unit s internal memory by some new input state or value before it can be sent GFK 0825F Chapter 4 Operation 4 13 Operation of the BIU with a Micro Field Processor The Micro Field Processor MFP is a specialized Micro PLC that provides local input output logic within a Field Control I O station The MFP itself
182. figuration This menu appears F1 GENIUS CONFIG F2 Module Config More Press F3 to display the next configuration screen F1 Grp Data Move F2 Previous Menu More Press F1 to display the first Group Data Move configuration screen Grp Data Move 01 lt _ Group at Cursor YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY location represents a Group Data move On this screen each of the 16 potential Data Groups is represented by a letter N for No or Y for Yes The number of the Data Group indicated by the cursor also appears in the upper right corner of the screen To delete a previously configured data group on the screen shown directly above move the cursor under the group to delete Press F3 delete to remove the configuration for that group GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 107 Chapter Diagnostics and Fault Clearing 6 This chapter describes the diagnostics capabilities of the Bus Interface Unit and explains how faults can be cleared from a Hand held Monitor or programmer Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for Intelligent Modules Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for the BIU and Conventional Modules Display and Clear Faults from a Genius Hand held Monitor Display and Clear Faults from a Series 90 PLC Display and Clear Faults from a Series Five or Series Six PLC Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for Intelligent Modules Some types of Field Control modules for example RTD and Thermocouple modules c
183. g entr This screen shows the default table and length and the next available reference address for that reference type The length is displayed in appropriate units AI and AQ in words Q and I are bits An asterisk indicates that the reference is not yet defined If the present selection is acceptable press F4 enter to accept it The asterisk will disappear If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping length or reference value press F3 change S 4 AI AI Select table chg entr From this screen you can display the other data types by pressing F3 toggle Press F4 enter when the desired data type is displayed S 4 AI AT 004 Select length chg entr If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type press F3 clear to clear the length field Enter the new length from the keypad If you enter an invalid length the HHM prompts BAD LENGTH ERR After entering the correct length the offset starting reference screen appears The BIU automatically supplies the next available address in the selected table Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F You can press F4 enter to accept this value or F3 clear then enter a new value from the keypad Press the F4 enter key after entering a new offset S 4 AI AI 004 Ref Addr 01896 clr entr Use the F2 gt key to display the screen for the module s
184. ge PEEB a le 16 parameters GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 19 8 20 Additional Configuration Data for an 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module ALG281 The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 149 for an 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input module IC670ALG281 is listed below See page 8 18 for the content of bytes 0 to 13 PLEASE CHECK I THINK THE OCMT WRITEUP FOR 22 23 28 29 WAS WRONG I MADE THEM MATCH OTHER MODULES 1 span 10000mV to 10000mV 2 span OmV to 10000mV Byte Description Byte Description 14 oe of input reference parameters 40 41 Ch1 Low Span 10000 to 10000 15 umber of output reference parameters 42 43 Ch1 High Span 10000 to 10000 16 17 Byte rue of analog input data default 44 45 Ch 1 Low Eng Units 32768 to 32767 is 16 18 19 emory type for the module s analog 46 47 Ch 1 High Eng Units 32768 to 32767 input data usually type Al Enter one of the following numbers 16 table 18 Q table 10 Al table 12 AQ table 20 21 Relative offset from start of table 48 49 Ch1 Low Alarm 22 23 Byte length of discrete diagnostic input 50 51 Ch1 High Alarm data default is 5 24 25 Memory type for the module s diagnostic 52 65 Ch 2 parameters input bits usually type I Enter one of the numbers listed above 26 27 Relative offset from start of table 66 79 Ch 3 parameters 28 29 Byte length of module s co
185. gt ATI DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr For data going to the module type Q which is included within the BIU s I O map you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network S 4 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr 5 42 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure Filtering Next select the filtering delay to eliminate noise due to the AC power lines Filtering increases the response time to changes in a channel The choices for filtering are A 10 ms The module averages the most recent 8 samples of the input B 20 ms The module averages the most recent 16 samples of the input The module will perform filtering on all inputs on the module that are configured as active S 4 FILTERING 20MS lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Configure the Line Frequency Next set the line frequency for the module Select 50 or 60 Hz Disturbances due to AC noise cause variations around the desired DC level The amplitude of these variations can be reduced by configuring the rate at which the module scans inputs for the operating frequency If the line frequency is configured at 60 Hz the module scans each input channel every 1
186. gt AQ LT ZERO F4 F2 Y F1 LT ZERO F4 F2 F1 DEFAULT ZERO 1 Configuring the MFP s Reference Parameters as described here Reference Parameter is the term used here to describe data usually of more than one data type that is transferred between an intelligent module and the Bus Interface Unit during each BIU sweep All data exchanged by intelligent modules in a Field Control station is called Reference Parameters 2 Configuring any Group Data Moves that will be used to transfer Micro Field Processor data during specified BIU sweeps All Group Data Moves are considered part of the Bus Interface Unit s own configuration It is possible to configure a Micro Field Processor or any other type of intelligent module to have only Reference Parameters and no Group Data or only Group Data and no Reference Parameters But both types of data transfers can be used in a system The typical configuration is to use only Reference Parameters Configure the Reference Parameters for the Micro Field Processor To configure Reference Parameters for a Micro Field Processor go to this menu F1 Monitor F2 Configuration Select F2 configuration If the module has not previously been added to the BIU configuration the module configuration screen looks like this Slot S 1 EMPTY number tgl read If the module is already installed and powered up select F2 gt repeatedly until the menu below appe
187. h explains how to configure I O modules The Series 90 Micro Field Processor User s Manual GFK 1171 which describes the Micro Field Processor IC670MFP 100 and provides installation procedures operation information and diagnostics information The Field Control I O Modules User s Manual GFK 0826 which describes I O modules and I O Terminal Blocks This manual also explains module installation and field wiring Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Environmental Specifications Vibration Modules perform well where vibration is a factor Designs are shock and vibration tested to meet the following specifications when installed on a panel mounted DIN rail using the clamp supplied and with the panel mounting feet secured IEC68 2 6 10 to 57 Hz 0 012 in displacement peak to peak 57 to 500 Hz at 2 g unless otherwise specified TEC68 2 27 Shock 15G 11 milliseconds half sine wave Noise Modules are resistant to noise levels found in most industrial applications when installed according to accepted practices including proper separation of wiring by voltage and power levels on a conductive unpainted DIN rail The DIN rail is an integral part of the grounding system Modules are tested to the specifications listed in the Conformance to Standards document GFK 1079 Temperature Modules operate reliably in ambient air temperatures from 0 deg C 32 deg F up to 55 deg C 131 deg
188. he next page When you then install and power up the Bus Interface Unit CONFIGURATION MISMATCH faults will not be generated You can complete the rest of the configuration after installation and powerup if you prefer B Take the BIU off the bus prior to configuring the Bus Interface Unit Configure the Bus Interface Unit baud rate serial bus address and network map while the BIU is off the bus 5 2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Set Up the Hand held Monitor GFK 0825F 1 If the Bus Interface Unit is connected to an operating bus the Hand held Monitor must be the ONLY Hand held Monitor plugged into any device on the bus If the Bus Interface Unit is NOT presently connected to a properly terminated Genius bus install a 75 Ohm terminating resistor across the Main Bus Serial and Serial 2 terminals on the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block The resistor is needed only for off line communications between the HHM and the Bus Interface Unit it should be removed prior to bus installation unless the BIU Terminal Block is the last device on the bus 2 Begin with the HHM turned off Attach it to the connector on the Bus Interface Unit a gt GENIUS mon Tini ANni A Fanuc Cae 4 5 6 po y S a 2 A S 1 2 3 5 o SSS L JS Jae OQ i i oy 0 T E O i CF a C 3 Turn the Hand he
189. he next screen Engineering Units Specify whether the module should report values for the input as hundredths of millivolts or as tenths of degrees C or F S 1 CH1 UNITS MV lt gt tgl entr 1 Use the F3 tgl key if you want to change the current choice 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selection Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Thermocouple Type Next specify the type of Thermocouple present on the channel J K T E S R B N G C D or Platinel II The default is NONE If this default is selected the module will report inputs as millivolts S 1 CH1 TC TYPE NONE lt gt tgl entr Note If you selected Engineering Units of millivolts on the previous screen the TC Type should be NONE 1 Use the F3 toggle key if you want to change the displayed thermocouple type 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selection TC Type Low mV Limit High mV Limit Low Temperature High Temperature Limit C Limit C J 8 0960 57 9420 210 00 1000 00 K 5 8910 54 8069 200 00 1370 00 T 5 6030 20 2520 200 00 390 00 E 8 8240 76 3580 200 00 1000 00 S 0 1940 18 5040 40 00 1750 00 R 0 1880 20 8780 40 00 1750 00 B 0 03300 13 8140 100 00 1820 00 N 0 57480 47 5019 22 222 1300 00 G 0 00600 38 5639 4 444 2315 55 C 0 23400 37 0660 17 7777 2315 55 D 0 16300 39 5060
190. hich lack alignment tabs do not support Hot Insertion Removal of modules With these terminal blocks I O Station power should be off when installing or removing modules Mixing IC670CHS 10x terminal blocks with IC670CHSOOx terminal blocks in the same I O station is not recommended Faults Reported During Hot Insertion Removal When using the recommended equipment listed above Hot Insertion Removal will cause the expected fault reports related to the loss of or addition of the module and its I O circuits These faults should be cleared in the normal manner However Hot Insertion Removal of a rev J or later module will NOT cause Configuration Mismatch errors that in some types of systems can shut down the controller VO Module Data During Hot Insertion Removal As mentioned separate I O module power must be turned off for Hot Insertion Removal When the module is installed and power is reapplied module data will quickly return to normal For intelligent I O modules there may be a delay of a few seconds while the module goes through its powerup sequence Hot Insertion Removal for a Micro Field Processor A Micro Field Processor that is revision J or later may be removed inserted as described above Note however that although the Micro Field Processor will start functioning upon reinstallation the MFP s application program must be reloaded I O data controlled by the Micro Field Processor will be incorrect until that has been done The BIU
191. ht use a form like the one below to record your Group Data assignments Group Data Moves Worksheet Data Source Dest BIU Scans Move Src Dest Data Data Source Dest BIU Scans Move Src Dest Data Group Slot Slot Ref Ref Len Group Slot Slot Ref Ref Len 1 PENERE 1 9 EERE 1 ster 2 SE a J 0 fi 12 SEEE 3 nme 3 SESE 4 4 2 EEEN 1 10 EEEN 1 stere a 2 pio 2 J 0 i 12 J 10 i 12 Bliyisyie 3 muel 3 4 re ar 3 Tl2 31 1 11 Tl2 31 1 a stere 2 Eafe al E J 10 i 12 J 10 fi 12 13 14 15 16 3 matel 3 4 ooo 4 EEEN 1 12 aaa 1 a a a 2 pti 2 J 0 fi 12 J io i 12 onmo 3 muel 3 4 Fen A 5 EAER 1 13 Tl2 3 14 1 STOTT 1S a Te 2 A Les Le ba es J 10 fi 12 J 0 fi 12 onmo 3 nme 3 4 4 6 Tl2 3 14 1 14 EENEN 1 51678 STe TE 2 Loo o 2 J 10 fi 12 J 10 i 12 omote 3 muel 3 4 4 7 Tl2 3 14 1 15 EENEN 1 stere me 2 pj 2 J 10 i 12 J 0 i 12 Bliisyie 3 nme 3 4 4 8 Tl2 31 1 16 EEEN 1 stere sfere 2 Ee ee J 0 i 12 J 10 i 12 Bhiyisyie 3 nmo 3 4 4 5 102 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Set Up a Gr
192. ially be installed at that station External power must be supplied for field wiring of input and output devices The power supply is not damaged by either of the following Reversing input voltage on terminals and 2 Temporary overcurrent conditions on the 6 5 VDC output Timing The Bus Interface Unit provides power to all I O modules that are installed at the station I O module operation is governed by a System Reset signal to ensure controlled operation during the power up and shut down processes As shown in the timing diagram below momentary power losses of less than 10 mS for 24VDC BIU or 20mS for 115 VAC 125VDC BIU do not affect I O module operation Longer power losses generate a Reset for all system I O modules Input Power Input Power Momentary Nortel newer fe 4 Oss or 115 VAC Nominal Voltage Voltage Overshoot Overshoot 5 max 5 ey X 6 5V Output i ij l 95 min Hold Up Time Minimum pom 10mS for 24VDC BIU a ied pom min 20mS for 115VAC 125VDC BIU min 3mS le min RST GFK 0825F Chapter 2 Description 2 3 Backplane Current With a DC input voltage the amount of current available to the backplane may be limited by lower input voltage as indicated below For 24VDC Supply For 125VDC Supply Backplane 1 4 Backplane 2 0 Current 1 2 Current 1 8 Available 49 Available Amps feo Aeon Amps 18 19 21 105 110 Vo
193. ich the dual bus is connected can be installed on a bus stub Each device on a bus stub counts toward the total of 32 devices on the Genius bus Restrictions on the number and length of bus stubs that may be used on a dual bus are explained in the Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Chapter 2 GFK 0825F Description This chapter describes Genius Bus Interface Unit Bus Interface Unit Power Supply Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block Specifications Genius Bus Interface Unit The Genius Bus Interface Unit is a small rugged intelligent module with a sturdy aluminum housing The module has four status LEDs described below and a connector for attaching a Genius Hand held Monitor lt 3 25 8 2mm gt a BE lt HHM CSSD EE Connector 5 0 12 7mm o 2 LEDs The Bus Interface Unit contains the logic power supply needed to operate the I O modules connected to it It mounts on a separate terminal block to which it and all bus wiring are attached The configuration is stored in non volatile memory located in the terminal block Both the power supply and terminal block are described in this chapter Y The Bus Interface Unit has a replaceable 1A 5x20mm 250VAC slow blow fuse on the input power lines The fuse can be changed without disturbing the wiri
194. id input data the BIU generates a fault report to the host If the module is configured for Hold Last State the BIU holds the module s data at its last valid state If the module is configured to default its inputs the BIU places zeros in the module s assigned references for all inputs that are not forced Any forced inputs retain their forced states 4 BIU Sends Group Data to Synchronization Module If a module usually a Micro Field Processor has been configured as a Synchronization module the BIU next transfers group data assigned to be sent to it during that sweep 5 BIU Sends Reference Parameters to a Synchronization Module If a module has been configured as a Synchronization module the BIU next sends its reference parameter data from BIU tables 4 5 4 6 6 Move Input Data to the Communications Buffer The BIU then moves all current discrete and analog input values presently in its network map into a memory buffer in preparation for transmitting them on the Genius bus 7 Move Output Data from the Communications Buffer After moving the inputs into the communications buffer the BIU moves newly received output data from the communications buffer It combines this data with any existing forced discrete output states and analog values and places the combined data in its discrete Q and analog AQ output memories as defined in the BIU I O map If the BIU is not receiving outputs from the bus it sets mapped output refer
195. ilable references press F4 entr B If you want to change to another type of I O table press F3 toggle C If you want to assign specific references enter the starting address Press F4 entr For most applications all module references should fall within the network map configured for the Bus Interface Unit For local control a module can be configured outside the BIU network map In addition each data type I Q AI AQ has a total of 256 bytes allocated within the BIU So for each data type all references must be located within a 256 byte range For example if the starting address for analog input data configured for the Bus Interface Unit was AIO101 all analog inputs would need to be located between AIO101 and AI0228 Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type To edit the module s configuration press F4 zoom Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 29 Channel Fault Reporting The Bus Interface Unit can report faults for each channel to the network controller If fault reporting is enabled for a channel the Bus Interface Unit sends a message to the network controller such as a Series 90 PLC Bus Controller if any fault occurs on that channel If fault reporting is disabled the Bus Interface Unit does not send fault reports for the channel to the network controller Regardless of wheth
196. ination is the BIU except groups whose source is a Synchronization module y Send Group Data moves to a Synchronization module y Send outputs from BIU tables to Synchronization modules y Move all inputs within BIU network map from BIU tables to the Genius communications buffers y Move all outputs within BIU network map from the Genius communications buffers to the BIU internal tables y BIU Waits if MFP is busy y Read all reference input parameters from a Synchronization module y Read all group data to the BIU from a Synchronization module Y Send all outputs to conventional modules y Send all reference parameter outputs to esmart modules but not to a Synchronization module y Send all group data to all esmart modules except Synchronization module Background Tasks Group Data is moved only during its configured BIU sweeps The tasks shown in shaded boxes are performed only if the I O Station includes a Synchronization module The Synchronization module is usually a Micro Fleld Processor GFK 0825F Chapter 4 Operation The sweep of the Bus Interface Unit is the sequence of actions it executes repeatedly as long as the module is receiving power 1 BIU Reads Inputs from Conventional Modules The BIU first reads inputs from conventional I O modules The BIU combines input data with any correspond
197. ing Scaling Values If the circuit will not use millivolt or microAmp units the most accurate scaling values can be found by taking actual measurements of the process The process must be set to two distinctly different conditions so two sets of measurements can be taken If the analog module is already installed you can use it online to the process being measured to obtain actual data values By default the Bus Interface Unit performs a to 1 scaling on all channels Using the online method requires the prior configuration of at least the serial bus address the I O map and the module I O references Finding the Digital Value with the Module Online to the Process If the module is online to the process follow the steps below to find the scaling values 1 Set the process to the first condition to be measured 2 Using a suitable external device find the engineering units measurement for example PSI or degrees 3 Read the corresponding value with the Hand held Monitor or the Logicmaster software The units using the default scaling are millivolts or microAmps e using a Hand held Monitor in default mode go to the Monitor screens see chapter 7 if you need further instructions and read the channel s digital value e using the Logicmaster software go to the appropriate data table and read the channel s digital value 4 Set the process to the second condition to be measured and repeat steps 2 and 3 to find the second pair
198. ing forced data and puts it in its input data tables at the configured locations If a module fails to supply valid input data the BIU generates a fault report to the host If the module is configured for Hold Last State the BIU holds the module s data at its last valid state If the module is configured to default its inputs the BIU places zeros in the module s assigned references for all inputs that are not forced Any forced inputs retain their forced states For inputs from conventional analog modules the BIU also performs scaling calibration alarm checking and range checking 2 BIU Reads All Input Reference Parameters Next the BIU reads all configured discrete and analog reference parameters from intelligent modules including an MFP If a module fails to supply valid input data the BIU generates a fault report to the host If the module is configured for Hold Last State the BIU holds the module s data at its last valid state If the module is configured to default its inputs the BIU places zeros in the module s assigned references for all inputs that are not forced Any forced inputs retain their forced states 3 BIU Reads Group Data Whose Destination is BIU Next the BIU reads the input group data for which the destination is slot 0 the BIU from all intelligent modules except a Synchronization module The BIU reads only the group inputs that have been configured to be read during that sweep If a module fails to supply val
199. ing the Low Alarm Limit press the F4 enter key Then enter the High Alarm Limit for the channel S 2 CH1 ALRM HI 10000 lt gt chg entr That completes the configuration steps for one input channel on the 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input module Continue as described above to configure the rest of the inputs Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 63 Configure an RTD Input Module S1 ALG620 7E S1 Al Al004 Al00001 00004 F4 F2 y S1 I 1 032 aa F4 F2 Vo S1 Q Q 08 Q00001 00008 F4 F2 j S1 AQ AQ 004 AQ00001 00004 F4 F2 y F1 S1 Module gt l DEFAULT ZERO F2 y F S1 Module gt Al DEFAULT ZERO F2 y Ary S1 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO F2 y Fi S1 LINE FREQ 60 HZ F2 y F1 S1 CH 1 CONFIG F1 F2 select channels Vea 1CH 1 ACTIVE F2 y F1 S1 CH1 UNITS DEG C F2 y AFA SICH RIDTYPR 100 PT 385 F2 y F SICA WRETYP 3 WIRE hey F2 Yy S1 CH1 ALARM LO 00200 roy fet S1 CH1 ALARM HI 00800 A F2 y Fi S1 RESIST 1 00000 Fo y MFA Repeat for Other Channels When you select Read from the empty slot HHM screen this module screen appears Module version S 4 ALG620 lt gt del zoom Assign I O References for the Module Press F4 to zoom into the slot A screen like this appears S 4 AI AT 004 Number of f f AI01311 01314 tre edule ves lt gt ch
200. is parameter is normally left at zero The Offset is an optional fixed value that can be used to adjust for differences in thermocouples when the configured engineering units are either degrees C or degrees F For example if a thermocouple reads 25 3 degrees C when the actual temperature is known to be 25 0 degrees C a value of 30 would be entered to cause the thermocouple to read 25 0 degrees The value contains two decimal places and should be supplied in the units specified by the Range Type The value is applied before high and low alarm checks S 1 CH1 OFFST 01 00000 lt gt chg entr 1 Use the F3 change key if you want to change the Offset and enter the new value 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item Configure the Next Channel Continue to configure the next channel in the same manner 5 80 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure an 8 Point Analog Voltage Output Module S1 ALG310 1 0 lt gt delzoom ray EM S1 1 024 100001 00016 F4 F2 Y S1 AQ AQ 008 AQ00001 00008 E4 F2 Y S1 Q Q 016 Q00001 00016 F4 F2 S1 Module gt l DEFAULT ZERO Fo y A S1 Network gt AQ DEFAULT ZERO F2 y AA S1 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO Foy Art S1 LOC DEF OU ZERO F2 y F1 For HHM version 4 8 or above this channel S1 CH1 CONFIG F4 selection menu
201. l key again to go through the module names listed below When the correct module name appears press F4 entr 3 Complete the module configuration as described in this chapter Read a Module Identification with the Module Present If there is a module in the currently selected slot pressing F4 read from the empty slot screen brings up the module s identification screen Example screen for a non intelligent module to accept the currently displayed module type press F4 entr then complete the module configuration as described in this chapter RO S1 Mod type Discrete Out 16 Module type tgl entr If you want to change the module type displayed press F3 tgl to see the other module types Example screen for an intelligent module press F4 zoom to configure the I O references as described in this chapter You cannot change the module type of an intelligent module S 5 ALG630 1 0 Module type and version lt gt tgl zoom Delete an Existing Module Configuration To delete the configuration of the module in the present slot press F3 delete then F4 enter Note that this removes the entire module configuration Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 21 5 22 Configure a Discrete Input Module After you accept the module into the slot a screen like this appears S1 Mod Type Discrete In 16 pe ES S 1 I 16 Number of S1 1 16 I references for this mod
202. l of outputs normally provided from the network by the Bus Interface Unit if those outputs become unavailable This technique requires the addition of ladder logic to the application program To create this backup capability for one or more modules do the following 1 Configure the module outputs to the Bus Interface Unit outside of the BIU s network map that is the data exchanged with the bus but within the I O range of the MFP For example Network Map K Q00001 Q00024 BIU References Assigned to Module Outputs Q00025 Q00040 Po SERB elsielalgisieia BIU References Assigned to Micro Field Processor Q00001 Q00024 Q00025 Q00040 aoe H Q00041 Q00128 SPGYOO beb sp sis Ss CEseppe Sls sisi sls sioppisio Module Outputs Q00025 Q00040 slopbisiepbsisiolsslels 2 Create variables to monitor the presence of network outputs BIU outputs and to serve as a heartbeat to verify the presence of the network For the example the variables are VARIABLE DECLARATION TABLE REFERENCE NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION 100001 NETOUTS Network ou
203. l redundant bus cable exits away from the power Premolded Cable Positions for connections f Serial 1 Optional Serial 2 Redundant Shield In Bus iN Shield Out Shield Out Shield In Main Bus Serial 2 Serial 1 amp amp Premolded Cable Positions for Bus Interface Unit Mounted with Terminals on Left Bus Interface Unit Mounted with Terminals on Right RI amp amp a Serial 1 Serial 2 D Shield In T Main Bus Shield Out amp J Shield Out Shield In 2 Optional i Redundant Serial 2 i Bus Serial 1 J Where two prefabricated cable ends meet at the same device join the male and female ends see below If a prefabricated cable will be at the end of the bus requiring termination as explained and you want to use a prefabricated terminating resistor make the cable installation so that a female connector will be located at the device where the cable will be terminated male connector dW ANANA 3 12 Mating connectors female male connector connector e Ah C a female connector Mating connectors 46492 termina
204. ld Monitor on Adjust its baud rate if necessary Previously unconfigured factory shipped modules operate at 153 6 Kbaud standard You should be aware of the operating baud rate before trying to communicate with the Bus Interface Unit and the Hand held Monitor s baud rate should be set correspondingly After HHM powerup and setup the Home menu appears F1 HHM UTILITIES F2 ANALYZE F3 CONFIGURATION F4 DEVICE MEMORY If the message FUNCTION DISABLED appears during configuration the corresponding HHM option has been disabled To continue it will be necessary to change HHM options in the HHM Utilities menu If the message CONFIG PROTECTED appears the Bus Interface Unit configuration has been protected To continue it will be necessary to unprotect the configuration Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 3 Create a New Configuration If the Bus Interface Unit has already had its Serial Bus Address configured go to the instructions on the next page If the Bus Interface Unit has not been assigned a Serial Bus Address select F3 Configuration from the previous menu The configuration Main Menu appears F1 PROG BLOCK ID F2 CONFIG BLOCK F3 COPY CONFIG F4 Select Program Block ID F1 Assigning a Serial Bus Address to a New BIU The first step in configuring a new Bus Interface Unit is to assign its Serial Bus Address block number on the Program Block ID screen There are 32 available addresses from 0 t
205. le MOVs include Harris part number V220MA2A Panasonic ERZ CO5FK221U and Siemens 505K140 If necessary higher energy rated devices can also be used It is important to be sure that the MOV leads do not cause any shorts between the serial data and shield connectors Chapter 2 of the Genius I O System and Communications Manual GEK 90486 1 describes the noise rejection and filtering capabilities of the Genius bus It explains bus wiring practices for all applications That chapter also gives additional instructions for installing a bus outdoors or between buildings including recommendations for adding suppression at the point where the bus enters a building Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus This appendix describes the selection and operating characteristics of the bus cable that links Genius devices This information supercedes the equivalent text portion of chapter 2 of The Genius I O System and Communications Manual GFK 90486 The Communications Bus A Genius serial bus consists of two or more Genius devices and usually the bus cable that connects them A single block or bus controller with a Hand held Monitor directly attached properly terminated with a 75 Ohm resistor is considered the smallest possible Genius communications bus Wiring Guidelines GFK 0825F Four types of wiring may be encountered in a typical factory installation
206. longer times between messages All devices must detect messages within this skip time delay A bus collision two sources transmitting simultaneously results if this sequence is missed The skip time value is equal to one bit period except on the 153 6e rate where it is two bit periods long The longer interval is useful to accommodate the longer propagation delays due to longer bus cables or when delays are introduced by fiber optic or other repeaters The worse case is when adjacent SBAs are physically located at opposite ends of a long bus For example assume SBA 4 and 6 are at one end of a 2000 foot bus and SBAS at the other operating at 153 6s Kb When SBA 4 end character is detected SBA6 immediately starts timing 2 skip times 13 uSec to start of it s transmission SBAS receives the end character 3 uSec later and starts timing skip time 6 5 uSec Thus SBA 5 will start transmitting 9 5 uSec after SBA 4 quit This allows 3 5 uSec for the signal to get back to SBA6 to cancel its transmission turn The 3 uSec transmission delay leaves only 0 5 uSec to do this and avoid a collision between SBAS and 6 Bus collisions result in missing data or detected CRC errors Problems resulting from bus collisions can be fixed by not using skipping a SBA resequencing SBAs in order along the bus going from 153 6s baud to the 153 6e or a lower baud rate GFK 0825F Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus C 9 C 10 Bus Length The maximum bus length
207. low high span value For example if both the low span and high span values were configured as 10 000 the output current for the channel would be 10mA regardless of the AQ value The high span value must be greater than or equal to the low span value If you enter a high or low span value that violates this condition you will not be able to leave the span configuration screens until valid low and high values are configured Pressing the MENU Up key in this situation will cause the HHM to display the following message Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you want to return to the span configuration screens press F4 no If you want to clear the entire slot configuration instead press F3 yes The slot will then be displayed as empty Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure a Micro Field Processor GFK 0825F S1 MF Unassig S1 MF S1 MF S1 MF Ref Add 10000 MFP x x ypo F3 y F1 Select table F4 y A F1 Select length F4 y A F1 F4 y F1 gt S1 MF There are two basic steps to configuring a Micro Field Processor MFP PQ1 ned PQ1 l PQ1 1 000 PQ1 1 008 r00001 A PQ1 1 008 1 00008 F3 F4 F2y AFI Assign other reference parameters MFPAQ MFPI1 and MFPAI Fa Foy F1 DEFAU DEFAU F4 F2 S1 Module gt AI DEFAULT ZERO JL ZERO F4 F2 y FA S1 Network
208. ltage In Voltage In Calculating Input Power Requirements for a Bus Interface Unit The charts below show typical input power requirements for a Bus Interface Unit For 24VDC Bus Interface Unit For 115VAC 125VDC Bus Interface Unit 15 9 24 0 380 14 1 Typical 37 75 Typical i Input Typical 12 3 ppd 18 75 Power npu olt Amps Power 10 0 Watts 13 5 2r for AC Watts 77 Inputs 17 25 Inputs 55 8 25 3 4 T E eos 3 0 7 0 O 0 25 0 50 0 75 1 00 1 20 1 40 0 0 50 1 00 1 50 2 0 Total Backplane Current Amps Total Backplane Current Volts Note For a 24VDC Bus Interface Unit start up surge at full load is 15 50 Amps for 3 milliseconds maximum For a 115VAC 125VDC Bus Interface Unit startup surge at full load is 20 Amps peak for 3mS To determine specific system requirements Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules Use the appropriate graph of input power above to determine average input power Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the input current requirements Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current Allow for startup surge current requirements Startup surge current levels are a function of source impedance and therefore are installation dependent Startup surge currents can vary for approximately 3mS For the 24VDC Bus Interface Unit variance is between 25A and 50A For the 115VAC 125VDC Bus Interface Unit
209. m housings Bus Interface Unit and I O modules bolt securely to separate Terminal Blocks which provide all field wiring terminals The I O Terminal blocks are generic and allow different I O module types to be mounted on the same base I O Terminal Blocks are available with box type terminals barrier type terminals or wire to board connectors All Terminal Blocks must be mounted on a DIN rail The DIN rail which serves as an integral part of the grounding system can also be mounted on a panel Field Control Features Features and benefits of Field Control include wiring savings better up time easy installation and maintenance spare parts savings low cost feature flexibility open architecture adaptable to a variety of networks distributed I O small compact I O modules with generic terminal wiring bases DIN rail mounted 1 1 Field Control Modules There are three basic types of Field Control modules Bus Interface Unit The illustration below shows a Genius Bus Interface Unit J O modules Micro Field Processor Terminal Blocks O Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block o TO Terminal Blocks each of which accommodates two I O modules O Auxiliary Terminal Blocks These optional terminal strips can be connected to the side of an I O Terminal Block if extra common terminals are needed
210. mode input impedance 10 K ohm Receive mode load inductance transformer shunt inductance 6 millihenries 12 millihenries Receiver common mode rejection DC to 1 MHZ 60 dB Shield capacitor termination 0 1 microfarad Isolation serial bus to circuit continuous 240 volts AC Notes 1 Vp may vary among various module types 2 Rated load is half cable impedance when termination is included 3 Peak open circuit voltage contains underdamped ringing due to lack of termination 4 Input voltages between Vr and Vr thresholds are ignored GFK 0825F Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus Selecting a Cable Type The Genius bus is a shielded twisted pair wire daisy chained from block to block and terminated at both ends Proper cable selection is critical to successful operation of the system Each bus in the system can be any cable type listed in the table below Do not mix cables of different impedance regardless of cable run length Do not mix cable types in long and or noisy installations Other small size twisted pair shielded wire of unspecified impedance can be used for short runs of 50 feet or less using 75 ohm terminations Selection of wire type may be limited by local and national codes and industry standards Consult the cable manufacturer to determine the cable s suitability for a particular type of installation Conservative wiring practices and national and local codes require
211. module s fault clearing discrete output bits AQ and Q you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network Selectable values are ZERO and HOLD S 1 Network gt AQ DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr S 1 Network Q DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr In an I O station that includes local I O control some or all of the module s outputs may be assigned to addresses that are not within the BIU s I O map The defaults configured here do NOT apply to module outputs that are outside the BIU s I O map Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure Local Default Outputs Next select the default output mode used for all channels in the event of a local module failure or reset This is not the same as the data defaults described on the previous page which are for the BIU The choices for local default output are A ZERO The output of each channel goes to OmV in the event of a local failure or reset B HOLD LAST The output of each channel is held at the last value latched by the D A converters in the event of a local failure or reset provided the appropriate user power supply is present S 1 LOC DEF OUT ZERO lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go
212. n enter a new value from the keypad Press the F4 enter key after entering a new offset S 2 AI AI 016 Ref Addr 00114 lt gt clr entr The 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module is an intelligent module which uses more than one type of data Use the F2 gt key to display the screen for the module s discrete input diagnostic data S 2 I I 072 I101152 01223 lt gt chg entr You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 enter key The asterisk beside the data type disappears to show that the current values have been saved 2 I I 072 I01152 01223 lt gt chg entr Next go to the screen that shows the module s discrete output references which are used for fault clearing 2 Q x Q 016 Q00916 00931 lt gt chg entr You can also edit this screen Use the F4 enter key to save the selections and continue to the next item Note that all required references for the module must be entered You can give a reference parameter a length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU If you attempt to back out before the references are all configured the HHM displays the following screen Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you exit the references you have configured are not saved Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 57 Configure Data Defaults For data types AI and I you can determine what the BIU should do with the module s
213. n for the previous channel Pressing F1 lt from channel displays the module s last reference parameter screen Press F4 zoom to go to the first configuration screen for the channel When in a channel specific configuration screen press the up arrow MENU key to go to that channel s header screen If the BIU and Hand held Monitor do not support display of channel headers the header screens do not appear and keys F1 lt and F2 gt are used to scroll through channel specific configuration screens The following features are configured for each channel GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 67 Channel Active S 4 CH 1 ACTIVE lt gt tgl entr When a channel is configured as Active it is scanned for data and checked for errors If a channel should not be scanned that channel can be configured as inactive An inactive input channel returns the value 0 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Units Next select the conversion type for each RTD tenths of degrees Fahrenheit tenths of degrees Celsius or tenths of Ohms S 1 CH1 UNITS DEG C lt gt tgl entr 1 Press F3 toggle if you want to change the displayed type of units 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item Units Ranges The following table shows
214. nals current or voltage and digital values These digital values are 0 to 4095 for 12 bit converters Digital values are often referred to as counts They represent the data that is transferred between the Bus Interface Unit and an analog module To make the input or output data of conventional analog modules more meaningful to the application the Bus Interface Unit performs a conversion process called scaling note that the BIU performs scaling only for conventional analog modules ntelligent analog modules perform their own scaling Scaling converts the module s digital values to or from the engineering units values used by the application Typically the engineering units represent millivolts or microamps In other cases they represent physical units such as degrees or centimeters per second Since engineering units values are integers from 32767 to 32767 it is often necessary to use fractional units such as hundredths of degrees to preserve the resolution of a physical input or output Each channel of an analog module can be scaled independently Scaling is configured by entering corresponding low and high engineering units values and low and high internal values for two points The internal values represent millivolts or microamps The BIU uses the straight line defined by the two pairs of values to convert between engineering units and analog convertor counts The conversion takes into account the module type and the range
215. ned although any alarms that were already set can still be cleared using discrete output Q data S 1 CH 1 ACTIVE lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Scaling Range Scaling can be used to define a constant slope mapping from the value in engineering units sent by the BIU to a channel s output voltage The default scaling configuration 10V to 10V provides an output voltage range of 10 000 low span value to 10 000 high span value for engineering units AI values of 10 000 to 10 000 On this screen specify the default range used for scaling analog output data There are two predetermined range and data scaling combinations 10V to 10V and OV to 10V S 1 CH1 RANGE 10V TO 10V lt gt tgl entr The default is 10V to 10V which provides negative positive scaled values For positive values only select OV to 10V Note that if the OV to 10V range is used the module will not report underrange faults during operation For either selection you can use the default scaling parameters or enter different ones on the scaling screens Selection Data Range Output Voltage mV 10V to 10V 10 000 to 10 0000 10 000 to 10 0000 OV to 10V 0 to
216. nfiguring a Group is to specify the sweeps during which the data should be moved The screen shows the scans 1 to 16 when the BIU will transfer the indicated Data Group The number of the current Data Group appears in the upper left corner of the screen If every location on this screen is set to Y yes the BIU will transfer the data during each of its sweeps If every location s set to N the BIU will never move the Group Data Setting only one location to Y and the rest to N means the data will be transferred during every 16th sweep by the BIU 7 Sweep Enab 02 03 Group BIU sweep YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY BIU Sweeps lt gt del zoom for the Group Use the F3 toggle key to change to N any sweep the Group should not be moved You can select any combination of sweeps Select a number that is appropriate for the data in the Group Remember that skipping sweeps will speed up the operation of the BIU After completing this screen press F4 enter to download the group definitions to the module and update the group in the BIU EEPROM Return to the Group Screen After configuring a Group use the HHM s Clear key or F1 lt to return to the Group screen Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Deleting a Group Data Move To remove one or more Data Groups begin at the Main Menu for the BIU F1 Monitor F2 Configuration From this menu press F2 Con
217. ng of any other modules instructions are in chapter 3 2 1 2 2 LEDs The LEDs on the Bus Interface Unit show its operating status AAILOV YMd gasna ee PWR lights to indicate that 5V power is available for logic operation OK lights to indicate that the module has passed its powerup diagnostic tests See the table below for more information RUN lights only if output modules are in the BIU configuration and are written to by the controlling bus controller See the table below BUS B if the Bus Interface Unit is installed on a dual redundant bus this LED lights if Bus B is the currently active bus OK RUN Meaning ON ON Module functioning CPU communicating ON OFF Module functioning no CPU communications for 3 bus scans ON Blinking Module functioning circuit forced Blinking ON Circuit fault CPU communicating Blinking OFF Circuit fault no CPU communications for 3 bus scans Alternate Blinking Circuit fault Circuit forced Synchronous Blinking No CPU communications block number conflict OFF Blinking Electronics Terminal Assembly mismatch OFF OFF No block power or Block faulty Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Bus Interface Unit Power Supply The power supply in the Bus Interface Unit provides power for the Bus Interface Unit itself and logic power for all I O modules that may potent
218. nits screen hundredths of millivolts or tenths of degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit If units are subsequently changed alarm limits should be reviewed and adjusted if necessary S 1 CH1 ALARM LO 00250 lt gt chg entr 1 Use the F3 change key if you want to change the Low Alarm Limit and enter the new value 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item High Alarm Limit Next set the high alarm limit for a thermocouple The range is 32 767 to 32 767 The high alarm limit must be greater than the low alarm limit S 1 CH1 ALARM HI 01400 lt gt chg entr 1 Use the F3 change key if you want to change the High Alarm Limit and enter the new value 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item 5 78 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Reference Junction Compensation Specify how or whether the channel will perform cold junction compensation The choices are Local Remote Fixed and None The default is Local S 1 CH1 RJ TYPE LOCAL lt gt tgl entr Select Local if cold junction compensation will be provided for locally terminated thermocouples using a locally mounted thermistor either as part of a Thermocouple Terminal Block catalog number IC670CHS004 as described in the Installation Instructions or connected directly to the A and B
219. nput Voltage in millivolts The first scaling screen shows the engineering units value that is considered equivalent to the low span actual value Engineering units may be from 32767 to 32767 S 2 CHI ENG LO 10000 lt gt chg entr 5 54 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Enter the high span value for the channel This is the actual voltage in millivolts to be scaled to the high engineering units value S 2 CHI ENG HI 10000 lt gt chg entr Next enter the actual voltage in millivolts to be scaled to the low engineering units value S 2 CHI SPAN LO 10000 lt gt chg entr Span values are 8 signed integers ranging from 10 000 to 10 000 After entering the low span value for the input press the F4 enter key Enter a high span value for the same input S 2 CHI SPAN HI 10000 lt gt chg entr Alarm Limits The next screen is used to set the low alarm limit for the channel in engineering units S 2 CHI ALRM LO 10000 lt gt chg entr Each input channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit Alarm limits can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal The range for each is 32 767 to 32 767 The high alarm limit must be greater than the low alarm limit If alarm reporting is not wanted alarm limits can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they
220. ns of the PLC s I Q AI and AQ memory being used by a Bus Interface Unit In the reference tables for the PLC these inputs are displayed along with other system inputs When the programmer is attached to the PLC the programmer software can override or toggle the T O data and cause a change Monitor Control I O Data Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC 7 6 For a Series Six or Series Five PLC I O data for a Field Control station may be configured to use either I O or register memory To utilize the data correctly it is necessary to know the slot number of each module and the amount of input and output data it has Data lengths are equal to the amounts configured for I AI Q and AQ For discrete data 16 points 16 I O references or 1 register For analog data 1 channel 16 I O references or register Input Data Message up to 128 bytes discrete inputs analog inputs To CPU Configured Length m Configured Al Length m Field Control Data in I O Table Memory In I O memory data from a Bus Interface Unit is stored beginning at the assigned I O reference In the Input Table the sequence is discrete inputs then analog inputs In the Output Table the sequence is discrete outputs then analog outputs Field Control Data in Register Memory If Series Six or Series Five register memory is used for data from the Bus Interface Unit an amount is required that is equal to the total number of bytes of input data PLUS output da
221. ntr To configure the selected data type press F4 entr You can edit the length on this screen S 1 I I 032 Select length clr entr Enter the new length from the keypad Valid values are 0 8 16 24 or 32 bits for discrete input data type I data 0 8 or 16 bits for discrete output data type Q data up to 8 words for analog output data type AQ data If you enter a length of zero the HHM displays Unassigned for that data type If you enter an invalid length the HHM prompts BAD LENGTH ERR Data must be contained within byte boundaries entries for length and reference address are automatically adjusted if needed Lengths and reference addresses are adjusted down For example a length of 18 would be adjusted to 16 and a starting address of 5 would be adjusted to 1 After entering a valid length the offset starting reference address screen appears The BIU automatically supplies the next available address for the selected data type You can press F4 enter to accept the default value or enter a new value from the keypad Press the F4 enter key after entering a new offset S 1 I I 032 Ref Addr 00481 lt gt clr entr Module reference addresses for each data type must be greater than or equal to the starting addresses listed in the BIU map If you enter an invalid address the HHM prompts BAD REF ADDRESS Use the F2 gt key to display the screen for the module s analog output dat
222. ntr You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 enter key The asterisk beside the data type disappears to show that the current values have been saved S 4 I I 088 I01817 01904 lt gt chg entr Next go to the screen that shows the module s discrete output references which are used for fault clearing S 4 Q 0 016 0Q01817 01832 lt gt chg entr You can also edit this screen Use the F4 enter key to save the selections and continue to the next item Note that all required references for the module must be entered You can give a reference parameter a length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU If you attempt to back out before the references are all configured the HHM displays the following screen Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you exit the references you have configured are not saved Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 41 Configure Data Defaults For data types AI and I you can determine what the BIU should do with the module s data if the BIU loses communications with the module Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero You can accept DEFAULT ZERO with the F4 enter key or press F3 toggle then F4 enter to change to DEFAULT HOLD and save it S 4 Module gt I DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr S 4 Module gt I DEFAULT HOLD lt gt tgl entr S 4 Module
223. ntrol output 80 93 Ch 4 parameters bits default is 1 30 31 Memory type for the module s control 94 107 Ch 5 parameters output bits usually type Q Enter one of the numbers listed above 32 33 Relative offset from start of table 108 121 Ch 6 parameters 34 bit 4 Line Frequency 0 50Hz 1 60Hz 122 135 Ch7 parameters 34 bits Filtering Method 0 None 1 10mS 136 149 Ch8 parameters 0 1 2 20mS 35 reserved 36 37 Active Channel Bit Map 1 bit per channel 38 39 Ch1 Range Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Additional Configuration Data for a 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module ALG282 The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 261 for a 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input module IC670ALG282 is listed below See page 8 18 for the content of bytes 0 to 13 PLEASE CHECK I THINK THE OCMT WRITEUP FOR 22 23 28 29 WAS WRONG I MADE THEM MATCH OTHER MODULES Byte Description Byte Description 14 umber of input reference parameters 40 41 Ch1 Low Span 10000 to 10000 15 umber of output reference parameters 42 43 Ch1 High Span 10000 to 10000 16 17 Byte length of analog input data default 44 45 Ch 1 Low Eng Units 32768 to is 32 432767 18 19 emory type for the module s analog 46 47 Ch 1 High Eng Units 32768 to input data usually type Al Enter one of
224. o 31 on a bus One is needed for the Hand held Monitor typically this is 0 Another is needed for the Bus Controller Typically this is 31 30 or 31 for redundancy systems A Bus Interface Unit is usually assigned a Serial Bus Address from 1 to 29 or 30 Duplicate Serial Bus Addresses disrupt communications and are not permitted PROG BLOCK ID I O BLOCK NO ref blk nxt 1 Press F2 Block Then enter the Device Number 1 30 For example PROG BLOCK ID I O BLOCK NO 14 bik nxt If you make a mistake press F2 again then enter the correct number 2 If you are configuring the Bus Interface Unit on an operating bus when you press the Enter key an error message appears if the number has been used for another device If the Bus Interface Unit is not online be sure to assign a unique Serial Bus Address or there will be a conflict when the Bus Interface Unit is powered up on the bus 3 Press the Home key to return to the HHM s Main Menu The message Please Wait appears 5 4 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure the Bus Interface Unit GFK 0825F From the HHM s Main Menu F1 HHM UTILITIES F2 ANALYZE F3 CONFIGURATION F4 DEVICE MEMORY Press F2 twice to display the HHM s special set of menus for the Bus Interface Unit To display these menus a serial bus address must have been configured for the Bus Interface
225. of scaling values Finding the Digital Value without the Module Online If the module is not online to the process you will need to take two measurements from the process and also measure the voltage or current associated with each Convert this measurement to millivolts for voltage or microAmps for current Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Example of Scaling an Analog Input A channel is configured in the 0 to 10 volts DC range It measures a velocity input Electronic sensors and mechanical linkage external to the block have determined that an input level of 1 5 volts DC is equal to 20 feet second 6 meters second and that 9 volts DC is equal to 180 feet second 50 meters second Plotting these values on a graph shows that a signal of 5 volts DC corresponds to a speed of 73 3 feet second Velocity A 200 46746 150 100 7 50 9 0V 180 ft sec Input 720 S oF 50 1 5V 20 ft sec 60 7 5 0 Voltage 9 0 10 0 For engineering units of feet per second the following scaling values are used Low engineering units High engineering units Low internal units High internal units 20 180 1500 9000 ft sec ft sec millivolts millivolts An input value of 5 0 volts would be scaled to an engineering value of 00073 ft sec In this example scaling to hundredths of feet per second would provide better resolution
226. of the selected BIU table table to put MFP Q table data 0 255 to get data for the MFP s Al table 0 255 22 23 Byte length of the number of inputs to the BIU 40 Number of checksums O means do not check from the MFP s AQ table 0 254 program logic match 0 255 24 25 BIU table to put AQ table from the MFP Enter 41 Byte checksum of the MFP ladder logic one of the numbers listed above 26 27 Byte offset from the start of the selected BIU 42 43 Word LRC checksum of MFP ladder logic table to put MFP AQ table data 0 255 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Group Data Move Configuration Data Format GFK 0825F Bytes 0 to 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Bytes 20 to 26 Byte 27 0 7 Je ls J4 Is 2 h 7 le s l4 fs l h fo 7 Je 5 Ja fs J2 h Jo 7 Je 5 Ja fs J2 h fo 7 6 5 14 3 2 1 J0 LSB 7 6 5 14 3 2 1 J0 MSB 7 Je 5 Ja ls l2 Ji Jo 7 le 5 l fo j Jo 7 Je Js Ja fs l2 Ji fo 7 Je Js Ja Js l2 Jo Chapter 8 Datagrams must be FF hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BSM State read only BSM Present 1 yes 0 no BSM Controller 1 yes 0 no BSM Forced 1 yes 0 no CPU Redundancy 00 no redundancy 01 Hot standby 10
227. oggle then F4 enter to change to DEFAULT HOLD and save it I data is diagnostic data sent by the module S 4 Module gt I DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr AI data is RTD input data sent by the module S 4 Module gt ATI DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr For command data going to the module data types Q and AQ which is included within the BIU s T O map you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network S 4 Network gt Q DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr Line Frequency Next set the line frequency for the module Select 50 or 60 Hz S 1 LINE FREQ 60 HZ lt gt tgl entr 5 66 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Circuit Configuration The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the module the Hand held Monitor and the BIU Channel Header For module version IC670ALG620 version 1 4 or later if the BIU and Hand held Monitor support display of channel headers a header screen appears for each channel as shown below S 1 CH 1 CONFIG lt gt zoom A Press F2 gt from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel Pressing F2 gt from channel 8 displays the module s first reference parameter screen B Press F1 lt from this screen to go to the header scree
228. oils and machine limit switches This is generally the interface level of the Genius discrete I O 3 Analog wiring transducer outputs and analog control voltages This is the interface level to Genius I O analog blocks 4 Communications and signal wiring the communications network that ties everything together including computer LANs MAP and Genius I O and communications bus These four types of wiring should be separated as much as possible to reduce the hazards from insulation failure miswiring and interaction noise between signals A typical PLC system with Genius I O may require some mixing of the latter three types of wiring particularly in cramped areas inside motor control centers and on control panels In general it is acceptable to mix the communications bus cable with the I O wiring from the blocks as well as associated control level wiring All noise pickup is cumulative depending on both the spacing between wires and the distance span they run together I O wires and communications bus cable can be placed randomly in a wiring trough for lengths of up to 50 feet If wiring is cord tied harnessed do not include the bus cable in the harness since binding wires tightly together increases the coupling and mechanical stress that can damage the relatively soft insulation of some serial cable types Wiring which is external to equipment and in cable trays should be separated following NEC practices Installing Additional
229. ol bit followed by 8 bits of data sent LSB first The last bit is a stop bit always 1 Successive characters are sent with no time space between them The control bit is used to signal the type of character being sent A 1 indicates a control character and 0 a data character A minimum transmission is comprised of a start character one or more data characters and a stop character The Start character data contains the address and whether the transmission is directed to a specific address or a broadcast to all The End character contains the CRC 6 checksum More complex transmissions may have additional start and end of block characters to break up the message into blocks of data not to be confused with Genius I O Blocks For example a Bus Controller can send device specific messages blocks of data to all devices on the bus during one transmission cycle Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Bus Access All devices must receive the current SBA and the stop character even though the data is irrelevant locally After the stop control character is received each device on the bus starts a timer The time delay is equal to a skip time times the difference between the device Serial Bus Address SBA and the last SBA received The device will transmit after the time delay if no other start bits are detected first Thus each device takes turn in order of SBA Unused SBAs result in
230. ons can be made using standard bus cables cable specifications for the Genius bus are detailed in Appendix C Also see Appendix C for a discussion of the characteristics of the Genius bus When making bus connections the maximum exposed length of unshielded wires should be two inches Scm For added protection each shield drain wire should be insulated with spaghetti tubing to prevent the Shield In and Shield Out wires from touching each other or the signal wires For applications using 150 ohm cables prefabricated cables are available in 15 IC660BLC001 and 36 IC660BLC003 lengths These cables terminate in mating connectors that simplify wiring between I O blocks The 36 cable is recommended for Field Control installations SHDSHD SER SER OUT IN 2 1 AANA SHDSHD SER SER OUT IN 2 1 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Making Bus Connections 1 Connect Serial 1 to the Serial 1 terminals of the previous device and the next device Connect Serial 2 to the Serial 2 terminals of the previous device and the next device 3 Connect Shield In to Shield Out of the preceding device Connect Shield Out to Shield In of the next device If the Bus Interface Unit is the first device on a bus Shield In can be left unconnected If it is the last device on a bus Shield Out can be left unconnected
231. ossible with a varying amount of time consumed each sweep In the Constant Sweep Time mode each sweep consumes the same amount of time This time is configurable to be from 5 to 200 milliseconds When the MFP is in Stop mode the application program is not executed In this mode it is possible to choose whether or not the I O is scanned internally by the MFP and whether communications with the programmer will continue If the BIU requests data from the Micro Field Processor while the MFP is in Stop Fault mode the requested data will either be defaulted or held in its last state depending on the configuration of the MFP In Stop No I O mode the MFP updates its internal I AI tables with data received from the BIU and sends zeros for all data reference or group to the BIU 4 14 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Synchronous Operation of a BIU and a Micro Field Processor 3 4 g 10 11 12 GFK 0825F Bus Interface Unit Read all inputs from conventional discrete and analog input modules i Read all reference parameter inputs from smart modules Micro Field Processor FP Waits y l Read all group data moves whose destination is the BIU except groups whose source is a Synchronization module Y Send Group Data moves to a Synchronization module MFP receives Group Data from the BIU Y FP Waits
232. ould be sent at 165 ft sec Since these two diagnostic messages are the same it would be necessary for the program to keep track of the level of the Alarm Thresholds and recognize this as a higher alarm than that received initially At the same time it could move the low alarm to 140 ft sec and use this level to detect the end of the high alarm conditions GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 33 Default Inputs or Hold Last Values Next configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the network controller if it stops receiving actual input data from the module S1 Hld Lst State NO lt gt tgl entr 1 Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold inputs in their last states and supply that data to the network controller Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module s inputs to 0 and supply that data to the network controller instead 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the entry 3 Press F2 gt to return to the original slot configuration screen 5 34 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configure a Conventional Analog Output Module S1 Mod Type Analog 4 cur Out _ FLY S1 AQ 04 AQ OMi S1 AQ 04 AQ00001 FLY S1 Ref Address A000001 py S1 Hid Lst State NO my FI S1 Out Def Ch 01 00000 RY ipi Qrtrnnrt P fanlte for other channels py S1 Faults Ch 01
233. oup Data Move To configure one or more Data Groups begin at the Main Menu for the BIU F1 Monitor F2 Configuration From this menu press F2 Configuration This menu appears F1 GENIUS CONFIG F2 Module Config More Press F3 to display the next configuration screen F1 Grp Data Move F2 Previous Menu More Press F1 to display the first Group Data Move configuration screen Grp Data Move 01 lt Group at Cursor NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Location lt gt del zoom Each N or Y l represents a potential Group Data move On this screen each of the 16 potential Data Groups is represented by a letter N no moves are defined for that group or Y for Yes at least one move is defined in the group The number of the Data Group indicated by the cursor also appears in the upper right corner of the screen Move the cursor under the number of a group to set up and press F4 zoom Identify the Source and Destination Device The HHM is now ready to configure the parameters for the Group Group Move 1 0 Source Slot 0 lt gt entr GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 103 The number in the upper right corner of the HHM screen shows the group number 1 in the example above The 0 indicates the slot definition For each group move the BIU can move data in one direction to or from any intelligent module in the I O Station including itself It is also possibl
234. pes are not displayed here For the input data types AI and I select what the BIU should do with the MFP s data if the BIU loses communications with the MFP Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to Zero S 4 Module gt amp I S 4 Module gt AI DEFAULT ZERO DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr lt gt tgl entr You can accept DEFAULT ZERO with the F4 enter key or press F3 toggle then F4 enter to change to DEFAULT HOLD and save it For output Q and AQ data which is included within the BIU s I O map determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network S 4 Network gt Q S 4 Network gt AQ DEFAULT ZERO DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr lt gt tgl entr When you are finished assigning and saving the Reference Parameters and data defaults for the Micro Field Processor use the F2 gt to return to the first Micro Field Processor configuration screen Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 101 Configure Group Data Moves The BIU Micro Field Processor and intelligent modules can also be configured for Group data transfer Group data is a set of data that the BIU regularly transfers from one location in the station to another Up to 16 data groups can be set up for an I O station Each group can consist of up to four separate data moves between the same two devices and in the same direction You mig
235. physical separation between control circuits and power distribution or motor power Refer to sections 430 and 725 of the National Electric Code Outer Terminating Number of Dielectric Ambient Maximum Length Cable Run Diameter Resistor Conductors Voltage Temp feet meters at baud rate 10 to 20 AWG Rating Rating 1 2 Watt Deg C eA Renee a a a NN GE OL A 9823 none 350i 150 ohms 2 22 30V 2000f 3500f 4500f 7500f C 4596 CL2 8 89mm 606m 1061m 1364m 2283m M M39240 CM B 89182 CL2P 322in 150 ohms 2 22 150V 200 2000f 3500f 4500f 7500f 8 18mm 606m 1061m 1364m 2283m B 9841 CM 270in 120 ohms 2 24 30V 1000f 1500f 2500f 3500f M M3993 CL2 6 86mm 303m 455m 758m 1061m A 9818C CL2 330in 100 ohms 2 20 300V 1500f 2500f 3500f 6000f B 9207 CM 8 38mm 455m 758m 1061m 1818m M M4270 CM 9109 282in 100 ohms 200 B 89207 4198 M M44270 9818D 1 2500f 3500f 6000f 9815 758m 1061m 1818m i 80 1 4500f 1364m E 532185 CM approx 50in 100 ohms 4 pairs 24 gt 150V 1500f 2000f 30008 4500f BBDN 12 7mm solid 455m 606m 909m 1364m 1 315in 100 ohms 4 two pair 22 150V 1200f 1700f 3000f 4500f CM 8 00mm 364m 516m 909m 1364m CM 1 none 274in 100 ohms 4 two pair 22 150V 200 1200f 1700f 3000f 4500f B 89696 CMP 6 96mm 364m 516m 909m 1364m B 89855 CMP A none 243in 75 ohms 2 20 150V 800ft 1500f 2500f 3500f B CM 6 17mm 242m 455m 758m 1061m M M4154 CL2 A 5902C none 244in 75 ohms 4 two pair 22 300V 200ft 500ft 1200f 2500f
236. plane times Longer Genius bus scan times tend to reduce the overall load to the BIU and thus slightly decrease backplane scan times An estimate of backplane scan times can be found using this equation Backplane scan time mS I O X 0 8 2 25 Genius Bus Scan Groups MFP 1 In the equation VO 0 150 X number of conventional module discrete I and Q bytes 0 500 X number of conventional module analog AI and AQ words 0 090 X number of intelligent module discrete I and Q bytes 0 150 X number of intelligent module analog AI and AQ words 0 500 X number of I O modules Groups 0 015 X number of bytes internal BIU table moves 0 093 X number of bytes BIU module moves 0 175 X number of bytes module to module moves MFP MFP logic sweep time if MFP synchronized Example 1 Four modules no Group Data Moves Genius bus speed is 47mS Slot Module Data per Module Time per Total Time word byte inmS 1 16 Point Grouped Analog Input 16 words AI 150 2 40 Module IC670ALG240 11 bytes I 090 0 99 2 bytes Q 090 0 18 2 Conventional discrete output module 2 bytes Q 150 0 30 3 Conventional analog output module 4 words AQ 500 2 00 4 RTD Input module 4 words AI 150 0 60 4 bytes I 090 0 36 1 byte Q 090 0 09 4 words AQ 150 0 30 number of modules 4 500 2 00 Total O 9 52 9 52 X 0 8 X 2 25 47 mS 8 07 mS Groups none 0 00 Micro Field
237. quired It can also be done using datagrams Forces can only be applied to the portions of the BIU s internal memory that are included in the BIU s I O map Forces cannot be applied to references that lie outside the I O map Forcing guarantees consistent I O behavior regardless of power failures or communications interruptions If you want to check out a circuit at the station the simplest way is with a Hand held Monitor using force unforce B fora host PLC data can be manipulated by overriding an input or output state in the PLC s override tables This is done with the programmer The PLC and Genius Bus Controller must be connected to the Bus Interface Unit and must be operating Both methods are described on the following pages They are valuable tools for verifying circuit wiring in a Field Control station Forcing Circuits Forcing an I O circuit from a Hand held Monitor causes the circuit to assume a selected state for discrete circuits or value for analog circuits Once forced a circuit retains the selected state or value even if power is cycled The forced circuit ignores data from an attached input device or output data from a CPU Forcing is the only method of manipulating I O circuits that guarantees a fixed output input state While any circuit in the station is forced the Bus Interface Unit s I O Enabled LED blinks The force is normally applied and removed with an HHM When unforced a circuit responds to real input or outp
238. r polypropylene are usually more durable Electrical characteristics cable manufacturers information about pulse rise time and NRZ data rate is useful for comparing cable types The Genius bit consists of three AC pulses the equivalent NRZ bit rate is about three times as great For assistance in selecting a specific cable type please consult your local GE Fanuc application engineer Prefabricated Cables For applications using 150 ohm cables prefabricated cables are available in 15 IC660BLC001 and 36 IC660BLC003 lengths These cables terminate in mating connectors that simplify wiring between I O blocks The 36 cable is recommended for Field Control installations D AVIAN ITI D AHAAA SHDSHD SER SER OUT N 2 1 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Effect of Long Cables Repeaters or Unspecified Cable Types On Maximum Length Bus Attenuation GFK 0825F Three effects limit the maximum length bus available at any baud rate 1 Voltage attenuation 2 Waveform distortion frequency dispersion 3 Propagation delays The transmitter output levels and receiver thresholds determine the maximum attenuation that can be tolerated For Genius products this is the principal determinant when using recommended cable types Distortion Waveform distortion is due to the limited ban
239. r analog modules E For a Micro Field Processor O Reference addresses O Data Lengths A Bus Interface Unit and I O modules can be fully configured using a Hand held Monitor Optionally a previously configured Bus Interface Unit can be reconfigured using datagrams For more information about configuration please refer to Chapter 5 of this manual HHM Configuration A Genius Hand held Monitor version 4 6 IC660HHMS501J or later can be used to configure a Bus Interface Unit HHM configuration instructions are given in chapter 5 In addition chapter 8 of this manual Datagrams explains how the configuration of a Bus Interface Unit can be completed or changed by sending it Write Configuration datagrams The Series 90 Micro Field Processor User s Manual GFK 1171 which describes the Micro Field Processor IC670MFP100 and provides installation procedures operation information and diagnostics information If the system host is a Series 90 70 PLC the Genius Bus Interface Unit must be included in the system configuration as a device on the bus Please see the programming software documentation for instructions 1 6 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Field Control in a Genius System GFK 0825F Using Field Control modules on a Genius bus combines the low cost small size and flexibility of Field Control with the versatility power and communications features of the Genius sys
240. r must occur and the device must log in with the Bus Controller s on the alternate bus The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block contains a built in bus switching relay that is used to switch busses in a dual bus system Other types of devices with this capability are dedicated Bus Switching Modules and Series 90 70 Remote I O Scanner modules These are the only types of devices that can be directly connected to both redundant bus cables A Bus Interface Unit cannot be used as the BSM Controller for a bus stub Other devices cannot be located on a stub downstream of a BIU Also the Bus Interface Unit should not be connected to an external Bus Switching Module Redundant Bus Configurations Many different redundant bus configurations are possible Three basic ways of using a Bus Interface Unit with a redundant bus are described below E A Bus Interface Unit can be installed directly on both cables of the dual bus pair The Bus Interface Unit is configured to operate as a bus switching device in addition to performing its normal functions Here two Field Control stations are installed on a dual bus Each Bus Interface Unit would be set up as a bus switching device 46472 E A Bus Interface Unit can be located on just one bus of a redundant bus pair if bus redundancy is not needed for the modules in that station In this example the Bus Interface Unit on the left is connect
241. r the Bus Interface Unit was Q01024 all module outputs would need to be located between Q01024 and Q03072 Discrete references are assigned on byte boundaries Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type To edit the module s configuration press F4 zoom Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Default Outputs or Hold Last State After selecting the module s reference address configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the module if it stops receiving outputs from the network S1 Hld Lst State NO lt gt tgl entr 1 Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold outputs in their last states and supply that data to the module Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module s outputs and supply that data to the module instead Note This selection has no effect if the BIU itself fails 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection If Hold Last State is set to NO the following screen appears Number of the point S1 Out Def Pt 01 at the cursor location 0010000010010101 lt gt tgl entr 3 On this screen select a default state 1 or 0 for each output 4 Use the cursor keys to select outputs Use the F3 toggle key to change the state of the output at the present
242. r the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master Genius ProLoop Series Three CIMPLICITY Helpmate PROMACRO VersaMax CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Logicmaster Series Five VersaPro CIMSTAR Modelmaster Series 90 VuMaster Field Control Motion Mate Series One Workmaster GEnet PowerTRAC Series Six Copyright 1996 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved Preface Content of this Manual This manual describes the Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit IC670GBI002 It explains operation of the Bus Interface Unit as a Genius bus device It also contains complete configuration instructions for the Bus Interface Unit and all Field Control I O modules Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 introduces Field Control systems the Genius Bus Interface Unit and other equipment that may be used with the Bus Interface Unit It will help you locate more information about the components and operation of Field Control products Chapter 2 Description Chapter 2 describes the Genius Bus Interface Unit module the Bus Interface Unit Power Supply and the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block and lists their specifications Chapter 3 Installation Chapter 3 describes Bus Interface Unit installation and gives system installation guidelines Chapter
243. ration 5 45 Input Scaling The following screens can be used to set up custom scaling values The 16 Point Grouped Analog Input Module performs its own scaling unlike conventional Field Control analog modules whose scaling is performed by the BIU Scaling can be used to define a linear relationship between a channel s input current in microAmps uA and the value in engineering units returned to the BIU The default scaling configuration provides values from 4 000 to 20 000 for an input current range of 4mA low span value to 20mA high span value To scale a channel choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value span and a corresponding engineering units value for each During operation the module will use these values to convert input currents into digital values that represent engineering units Scaling does not increase the resolution of the data but it does transform the values returned to the BIU into more convenient units The Open Wire diagnostic bit is enabled if actual input current value used for the Low Point is greater than 2 milliamps If the scaled data falls below the minimum for engineering units the module returns the minimum engineering units value 32768 If the scaled data rises above the maximum for engineering units the module returns the maximum engineering units value 32767 The illustration below shows the module s default scaling Engineering Units 25000 24000 Ape
244. rcuit configuration see above 70 Input 5 circuit configuration see above 15 reserved 71 reserved 16 17 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 16 72 73 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 72 18 19 high scaling point eng units 74 75 high scaling point eng units Isb in byte 18 Isb in byte 74 20 21 low scaling point digital counts 76 77 low scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 20 Isb in byte 76 22 23 high scaling point digital counts 78 79 high scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 22 Isb in byte 78 24 25 low alarm limit Isb in byte 24 80 81 low alarm limit Isb in byte 80 26 27 high alarm limit Isb in byte 26 82 83 high alarm limit Isb in byte 82 28 Input 2 circuit configuration see above 84 Input 6 circuit configuration see above 29 reserved 85 reserved 30 31 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 30 86 87 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 86 32 33 high scaling point eng units 88 89 high scaling point eng units Isb in byte 32 Isb in byte 88 34 35 low scaling point digital counts 90 91 low scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 34 Isb in byte 90 36 37 high scaling point digital counts 92 93 high scaling point digital counts lsb in byte 36 Isb in byte 92 38 39 low alarm limit Isb in byte 38 94 95 low alarm limit Isb in byte 94 40 41 high alarm limit Isb in byte 40 96 97 high alarm limit Isb in byte 95 42
245. rd identification fault bit msb 3 18 Slot diagnostics data no meaning for discrete boards Board Status Byte 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 0 Configured Mismatched Board ID Missing Mismatched I O Extra I O Module Status No User Power for some analog modules Smart Module Available Unsupported module type For conventional I O modules 01 in this byte indicates no faults For intelligent modules 41 hex indicates no faults Board ID Byte 2 If the designated slot has a discrete output module the most significant bit of byte 2 indicates whether the module has a blown fuse or loss of user power fault If the designated slot has a conventional analog input module the most significant bit of byte 2 indicates a loss of user power fault This byte has no meaning for other types of modules Bytes 3 18 Slot Diagnostics Data 7 6 5 iN 3 2 1 Jo L Input channel low alarm _________ nput channel high alarm Channel underrange Channel overrange Channel open wire for analog input modules in 4 20mA range reserved Loss of user power for analog output modules only Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 33 Appendix Scaling Analog Channels A This appendix explains how to select scaling values when configuring an analog input or output See chapter 5 for configuration instructions How Scaling Works Analog modules convert between electrical sig
246. re Fault Reporting 0 0 eesseecceessceeeeessececeessaeeecessaeeecessaeecsesnaeeceessneeesessaes 5 10 Configure Genius Bus Redundancy eeeceesssccceessseceeessneeecessnaeeeeessaeeeessseeeseesaes 5 11 Configure CPU Redundancy 20 nce aca ateie tase sie ena nna TEE iie 5 12 Configure Field Control Modules ee eeeseceeeesssceeeessneeecesseeecesssaeeeeesaeeesesseeesessaes 5 15 Fnable Disable the VO Scate ziisesic nic M Lenard 5 15 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Chapter 6 GFK 0825F Contents Disable Network I O Updates 2 0 00 eeeseeeesssceceessceceesseeecesseeeceessaeeesssaeeeeesseeeseesaas 5 15 Configure the Network Map for the Bus Interface Unit eee eeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeees 5 16 Configuring Extra References in the BIU W O Map eee eeeeccessseeeceesseeeeeesneeeseesaes 5 17 Add Modules and Assign References 0 ceesscccsessseeeceessseeeceessaeecsesaeeesessaeeeeeesaes 5 20 Configure a Discrete Input Module eee eeesseceessneeecesseeeceesnaeeceesnaeeesessaeeeeeesaes 5 22 Configure a Discrete Output Module ee essceccessseeeceesneeeceesnaeecesssaeeeeesseeesessaes 5 24 Configure a Discrete Input Output Module ee eeeecceeesseeeceesseeeeeessaeeecesseeeeeenaes 5 26 Configure a Conventional Analog Input Module 0 0 eee eeeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeessneeeeeeeaes 5 29 Configure a Conventional Analog Output Module ee eeeeeeseeeeeesnneee
247. re either millivolts or microAmps These units are easy to scale Simply use the table below to find scaling values that are appropriate for the channel s configured range Analog Current Input Module Range To measure Enter this engineering Internal Units Selected this current units value microAmps oma High 20 000 High 20 000_ oto2zoma oma tow ofiw f o L oma High 20 000 High 20 000_ Analog Current Output Module Range To output this Enter this engineering Internal Units Selected current units value microAmps oma High 20 000 High 20 000_ Otom oma Low ofiw f o L oma High 20000 High 20 000_ Analog Current Source Output Module IC670ALG320 in Voltage Mode Selected voltage units value microAmps 4to2z0mA ovolts Low Low 4000 Pt volts High 10 000 High 20 000_ owm ows tow 0 tow o msvws High m2500 High 20 000_ Connect the output load between Volt V and Return RET for the channel being used For 0 to 12 5 voltage place a jumper between RET and JMP on the terminal block Horner Analog Voltage Input Module HE670ADC810 Range To measure Enter this engineering Internal Units Selected this voltage units value A Oto10vots ovots Low ofto 10 000 cc 10 to 10 volts 10 000 10 000 L ovs High 10 000 10 000 GFK 0825F Appendix A Scaling Analog Channels A 3 A 4 Measur
248. reference is used only if a remote compensation value will be supplied to the module by the BIU Remote must be configured as the RJ Type For all other RJ Types enter a length of 0 Use the F4 enter key to save and continue S 4 AQ AQ 001 AQ01057 01058 lt gt chg entr All required references for the module must be entered You can give a reference parameter a length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU If you attempt to back out before the references are all configured the HHM displays the following screen Cfg Incomplete Clear Slot yes no If you exit from this display the references you have configured are not saved Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 73 5 74 Assign Data Defaults For input data types AI and I you can determine what the BIU should do with the module s data if the BIU loses communications with the module Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero You can accept DEFAULT ZERO with the F4 enter key or press F3 toggle then F4 enter to change to DEFAULT HOLD and save it Discrete input I data is diagnostic data sent by the module S 4 Module gt I DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr Analog input AJ data is input data sent by the module S 4 Module gt ATI DEFAULT ZERO lt gt tgl entr For command data going to the module data types Q and AQ which is included within the BIU s
249. rmocouple Input Module IC670ALG630 Reference parameters zero length Slot 5 16 Point 12 120 VAC Output Module IC670MDL330 Q00041 00056 Group Move 1 Source slot 2 Destination slot 0 move inputs from High level Analog Input module to BIU input tables All submoves can be set to default to either Yes or No Submove 1 Moves diagnostic bits Source reference 100001 Destination reference I00001 Length 11 bytes Submove 2 moves analog inputs Source reference A100001 Destination reference A100001 Length 32 bytes Group Move 2 Source slot 0 Destination slot 2 move outputs from BIU tables to High level Analog Input module control outputs Submove 1 Source reference Q00001 D 4 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 Destination reference Q00001 Length 2 bytes GFK 0825F 2 Group Move 3 Source slot 3 Destination slot 0 move RTD inputs to BIU input tables All submoves can be set to default to either Yes or No Submove 1 Moves diagnostic bits Source reference 100001 Destination reference 100089 Length 4 bytes Submove 2 moves analog inputs Source reference A100001 Destination reference A100017 Length 8 bytes Group Move 4 Source slot 0 Destination slot 3 move control outputs from BIU tables to RTD module Submove 1 Source reference Q00017 Destination reference QO0001 Length 1 byte Group Move 5 Source slot 4 Destination slot 0 mo
250. rol Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Bytes 14 61 Channel Configuration Byte Byte Description Byte Byte Description 14 Input 1 circuit configuration see above 38 Input 3 circuit configuration see above 15 reserved 39 reserved 16 17 low scaling point eng units 40 41 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 40 Isb in byte 16 18 19 high scaling point eng units 42 43 high scaling point eng units Isb in byte 18 Isb in byte 42 20 21 low scaling point digital counts 44 45 low scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 20 Isb in byte 44 22 23 high scaling point digital counts 46 47 high scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 22 Isb in byte 46 24 25 output default value lsb in byte 24 48 49 output default value lsb in byte 48 26 Input 2 circuit configuration see above 50 Input 4 circuit configuration see above 27 reserved 51 reserved 28 29 low scaling point eng units 52 53 low scaling point eng units Isb in byte 52 Isb in byte 28 30 31 high scaling point eng units 54 55 high scaling point eng units lsb in byte 30 Isb in byte 54 32 33 low scaling point digital counts 56 57 low scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 32 Isb in byte 56 34 35 high scaling point digital counts 58 59 high scaling point digital counts Isb in byte 34 Isb in byte 58 36 37 output default value ls
251. roller outputs go to their configured defaults or hold their last state In Hot Standby redundancy Bus Controller 31 always has priority when it is on line it has control of the outputs Duplex CPU Redundancy A Bus Interface Unit configured for Duplex mode compares outputs it receives from the two Bus Controllers to determine if they match If corresponding outputs are the same the Bus Interface Unit sets the output to that state If corresponding outputs are not the same the Bus Interface Unit sets the output to its configured ON or OFF Duplex Default State If either Bus Controller stops sending outputs to a Bus Interface Unit its outputs are directly controlled by the remaining Bus Controller Only discrete I O modules can operate in Duplex redundancy mode do not use Duplex mode if the station contains any analog I O modules il 1 10 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Using Field Control in a Genius Bus Redundancy System GFK 0825F In Genius bus redundancy there are two bus cables each connected to a Bus Controller I O devices may be connected to either one bus of the pair or to both However a device that is connected to both busses actually communicates on only one bus at a time Before the alternate bus can be used for communications a bus switchove
252. s Chapter I Introduction 1 7 A More Complex Field Control and Genius System A more complex communications and control system is illustrated below In this system the Field Control stations and Genius blocks on the lower left are controlled by a Series 90 70 PLC The Field Control stations and Genius blocks on the lower right are controlled by a host computer equipped with a PCIM Personal Computer Interface Module The PLC communicates with a computer running programming software via an SNP Serial Network Protocol link And the PLC host computer and programmer computer exchange system data via an Ethernet communications link Series 90 70 PLC SNP Ethernet Genius Bus Genius Bus For more information about Genius systems and communications please refer to The Genius I O System and Communications User s Manual which describes Genius system operation and communications formats The Bus Controller User s Manual for the system host which includes specific system interface instructions
253. s RTD module 5 68 Thermocouple module 5 76 Vibration specification Voltage attenuation C 7 Wire type for RTD module Wiring guidelines 3 3 Write Configuration pame Write Map datagram Index 5
254. s Five PLC this information is ignored If the host is a computer this information can be retrieved from the unsolicited datagram queue and interpreted as needed for the application Subfunction Code OF hex Byte Description 0 Fault Byte 1 Fault Byte 2 Fault byte 3 Fault byte 4 Fault byte 5 Fault byte 6 Fault byte 7 oak wn Fault Byte 1 byte 0 Fault type always 0 0 1 1 Type of module reporting fault 00 discrete output 01 discrete input 10 analog output 11 analog input Suppress alarm short fault only Always 0 Fault Byte 2 byte 1 Diagnostic table byte number 0 63 NOT USED This value points to an internal table where the Bus Interface Unit stores the English ASCII text used by the Hand held Monitor to create its fault message displays Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 5 Fault Byte 3 byte 2 Fault record number always 0 Number of fault records always 1 Fault Bytes 4 and 5 Fault bytes 4 and 5 bytes 3 and 4 of the datagram identify the reference offset within the Bus Interface Unit itself assigned to the faulted module This is an internal reference not a Series 90 70 reference byte 3 Diagnostic reference address LSB
255. s3 1 AQ AQ 0 AQ00001 00004 F2 F1 S1 Al Al 008 A100001 00008 F2 F1 S1 Module gt l F2 F1 DEFAULT ZERO F2 F1 DEFAULT ZERO F1 NETWORK gt Q DEFAULT ZERO F1 S1 LINE FREQ 60 HZ F2 Y he S1 OTC SUPPRESS F2 y Ary S1 CH1 RANGE TP F2 y Fi S1 CH1 ALARM LO 00250 F2 F1 S1 CH1 ALARM HI 4 F2 y AFA S1 CH1 RJ TYPE F2 Yy Ary S1 CH1 RJVAL 01 F2 y F1 S1 CH1 OFFST 01 F2 y AFA Repeat for Other F2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 When you select Read from the empty slot HHM screen this module screen appears S 4 ALG630 del zoom Assign I O References for the Module Press F4 to zoom into the slot A screen like this appears Number of references for this module type S 4 AI AT 008 AI00009 00016 lt gt chg entr This screen shows the default table and length and the next available reference address for that reference type The length is displayed in appropriate units AI and AQ in words Q and I are bits The asterisk indicates that the reference is not yet defined If the present selection is acceptable press F4 enter to accept it The asterisk will disappear If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping length or reference value press F3 change S 4 AI AI Select table tgl entr From this screen you can display the other
256. scaling screen shows the engineering units value that is considered equivalent to the low span actual value Engineering units may be from 32767 to 32767 S 2 CH1 ENG LO 10000 lt gt chg entr 5 62 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Enter the high span value for the channel This is the actual voltage in millivolts to be scaled to the high engineering units value S 2 CHI ENG HI 10000 lt gt chg entr Next enter the actual voltage in millivolts to be scaled to the low engineering units value S 2 CHI SPAN LO 10000 lt gt chg entr Span values are 16 signed integers ranging from 10 000 to 10 000 After entering the low span value for the input press the F4 enter key Enter a high span value for the same input S 2 CHI SPAN HI 10000 lt gt chg entr Alarm Limits The next screen is used to set the low alarm limit for the channel in engineering units S 2 CHI ALRM LO 10000 lt gt chg entr Each input channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit Alarm limits can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal The range for each is 32 767 to 32 767 The high alarm limit must be greater than the low alarm limit If alarm reporting is not wanted alarm limits can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be activated After enter
257. scanning frequency for Group Data 5 106 Index BIU sweep selective 4 4 BIU Terminal Block description 2 8 functional specifications 2 9 introduction BSM Controller 5 11 BSM Present 5 11 Bus access ambient specifications C 11 baud rate cable characteristics C 6 cable types C 4 cable with pre molded connectors connecting to BIU Terminal Block 3 10 connectors 3 13 electrical interface C 2 general transceiver specifications C 3 length C 10 lightning transients noise effect on data C 1 1 outdoors C 11 prefabricated cables terminated removing during operation repeaters using scan time 7 serial data format surge suppression termination 3 11 unspecified cable type usin g C 7 using other cable orela waveforms Bus B LED Bus Controller version required 1 9 Bus Interface Unit VO memory 4 2 installing on terminal block 3 14 introduction 1 3 removing from terminal block 3 14 Bus switching 1 11 Bus Switching Module C Cable types C 4 Cables between terminal blocks 2 8 installing 3 8 Calibration datagram Channel Active Analog input module Analog output module Analog Voltage Output module 5 86 A ed Analog Input module 5 45 5 95 Index 1 Index Index 2 RTD module 5 68 Thermocouple module 5 76 Circuit configuration RTD module 5 67 Clearances required Communications loss ofj 4
258. screte Data Network Processing ecsscceesssceceeesseeeeeseeseeeesesseeeseesaes D 1 Example 2 Discrete and Analog Data Network Processing ccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees D 2 Example 3 Discrete and Analog Data Network and Local Processing D 3 Example 4 Discrete and Analog Data Network and Local Processing and Group Data MOVES AAAA sta las ebb AAA AAAA A AAAA D 4 Exampl 5 Group Move nona aA AEA aI AEO rE Ene Eare ESOPU renina D 6 Contents ix Chapter 1 Overview Introduction This chapter introduces Field Control modules the Genius Bus Interface Unit and other equipment that may be used with the Bus Interface Unit It will help you locate more information in other Field Control and Genius documents o Bus Interface Unit waw GFK 0825F Field Control is a family of highly modular distributed I O and control products They are suitable for use in a wide range of host architectures The heart of the Field Control system is the Bus Interface Unit The Bus Interface Unit provides intelligent processing I O scanning and feature configuration for a group of up to eight I O modules Together the Bus Interface Unit and its modules make up a Field Control station see the illustration left The Bus Interface Unit and I O modules are enclosed in sturdy compact aluminu
259. seeesesseeeeeeeaes 4 17 How the Network Backs Up MFP Outputs eeeescccceesseeceesseeeesesnaeeeeessaeeeseenaes 4 18 Backing Up BIU Outputs with a Micro Field Processor escessseeceessseeeeeesneeeeeesaes 4 19 Example Ladder Logik a A a a ata ae dann ddandadadadadndadndadadads 4 20 Station Configuration sssscccccesessssoooccesessssooocccccesssssoocccesessssssoocccesesssssooose 5 1 For Additional Information Also See sesseessssesssseessscrrssrcerssecresserrssserrsseesseerssserressee 5 1 Configuring the Serial Bus Address and Baud Rate eee eeessceceeseneeeeeesseeeeeenaeees 5 2 Special Instructions for Series 90 70 PLC Systems 2 0 0 0 eeeseeeceeseseeeeeesseeeeeessaeeeeees 5 2 Set Up the Hand held Monitor s oc cccc cee Ga cent ae eeiee eae eaten ena ai 5 3 Create a New Configuration cc eessceceeessececeesnceecessnececeessaeeceessaeeccessaeeesesssaeeeeenaeees 5 4 Assigning a Serial Bus Address to a New BIU 00 eeesseecceesneeeeeeesnaeeeceeseeeeeesaeees 5 4 Configure the Bus Interface Unit eee eeessceceesssneceeceesnaeeeeessaeeecessseeesesssaeeeeesaeees 5 5 Field Control HHM Menu Overview cccsssecccccceeeeeeenneeeeeceeseeeenaaeeeeeeeeseeennaaeeeeeees 5 6 Change the Serial Bus Address of the Bus Interface Unit eee eeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeees 5 7 Select the Baud Rate is 3 6 2 5 3 6 0 8 0 6 cfd ent tah illo ehs dee aed 5 8 Select a Series Six or Series Five PLC Reference Address 5 9 Configu
260. should be in slot order Multiple packets for a slot must also be in order Multiple packets must be 128 bytes in length except the last which may be shorter Example Begin Packet Sequence subfunction code 06 hex Write Configuration 1 subfunction code 04 hex Write Configuration 2 Write Configuration N End Packet Sequence subfunction code 07 hex This contains the total number of BYTES in all Write Configuration packets For Field Control only the End Packet Sequence has 2 bytes Byte 0 is the least significant byte of the data length and byte 1 is the most significant 8 8 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Write Configuration Datagram Format for Field Control Intelligent Modules When using the Write Configuration datagram to configure Group Moves the datagram format is Byte Description 0 Slot number in bottom nibble Intelligent Packet in upper nibble Examples 01 hex writes packet 0 to intelligent module in slot 1 11 hex writes packet 1 to intelligent module in slot 1 1 Length sent in bytes maximum per packet is 128 2 optional If the slot number is 0 the location of the BIU and this byte is not included or if it is set to FF hex the BIU configuration is written If this byte is set to 01 hex through 10 hex the appropriate group information is written GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 9 Bus In
261. sserees 3 5 Installing the DIN Rath vrs an 22 eid eine teriosti ari eoster deri iesiti eA Ae 3 5 Installing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block on the DIN Rail eee eeeeeeeee 3 7 Installing the Cables Between Terminal BIOCKS eee eeeseeceeesneeeeesseeeceesneeeeeennaeees 3 8 Power Wiring to the Bus Interface Umit eeesseccessnececeesseeeceessaeeesesseeeseesaeees 3 9 Connecting the Communications BUS cceeesseeceeesseceeessseeeeeessaeeceessaeeesesseeeseesaes 3 10 BUS Cables ccvem sreeeck ANNA EET oh E E eh pote aed 3 10 Making Bus Connections isisi es heh chs S ohh ei abel cist nbs aTe E Ee 3 11 Installing the Bus Interface Unit on the Terminal Block eee eeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeees 3 14 Removing the Bus Interface Unit from the Terminal Block eee eeesseeeeeeeeeeee 3 14 Removing Replacing the Bus Interface Unit Fuse 00 0 0 eee eeeesesceeceesneeeeeesneeeeeesaes 3 15 Upgrading the BIU Firmwares s s c 3 s09 as yaets eaisots ease a Av on Aen ae ae ae 3 16 v Contents vi Chapter 4 Chapter 5 QO OH AEN OM sg casas cs vacsaecccctgvangcececesiscesuenscancueses se cusecdaascaucess cases daspee sauce SRo a EiS Soes iani 4 1 BIU Data Handling at the I O Station eeeceeesseeeceesseeesessaeeecessaeeesessaeeseenaeees 4 2 VO Data for Conventional Modules esceesscccceesscecsesseeeeessaeeecessaaeesessnaeeesenaeees 4 3 VO Data Status Data and Control Data for Intelligent Modules eeeeeeeeeeeeeees
262. ssor The Series 90 Micro Field Processor MFP is a Micro PLC that provides local logic within a Field Control station The Micro Field Processor is the same size as a Field Control I O module and occupies one of the eight available I O slots in a Field Control station MFP features include Compatible with Logicmaster 90 30 20 Micro programming software revision 6 01 or later Alarm processor Password protection Built in communications port that supports Series 90 protocols SNP and SNPX The Micro Field Processor requires a Genius Bus Interface Unit revision 2 0 or later Chapter I Introduction 1 3 I O Terminal Blocks and Auxiliary I O Terminal Blocks An I O Terminal Block provides mounting electrical and field wiring connections Each half of the I O Terminal Block can be mechanically keyed to accept only an I O module of a specific type Auxiliary I O Terminal Blocks can be easily attached to an I O Terminal Block They can be used to provide additional common terminals if needed For more information please refer to Chapter 3 Installation which explains wiring to the Bus Interface Unit and explains how to install the Bus Interface Unit module on the Field Terminal Block Chapter 2 Description which describes the Bus Interface Unit and Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block in detail Chapter 4 Operation which explains how the Genius Bus Interface Unit services I O Chapter 5 Hand Held Monitor Configuration whic
263. t modules provide and receive multiple types of I O data This data is sometimes called reference parameters For example the 16 Point Grouped Analog Input Module provides and receives the following types of data 16 two byte analog inputs for channel input data This data is normally configured to use AI memory although that is not required 88 bits of discrete inputs I for module and channel status data 16 bits of discrete outputs Q for fault clearing commands to the module Some intelligent modules use all four available data types discrete inputs and outputs and analog inputs and outputs The BIU reads input and status data and sends output and command data to intelligent module during every sweep of BIU operations Field Control Station Bus Interface Unit l p TET Q L a mteligent nalog Input a l Module AQ Reference Parameters are Transferred Each BIU Sweep GFK 0825F Chapter 4 Operation 4 3 4 4 Group Data for Intelligent Modules Intelligent modules can also be configured for Group data transfer with the BIU or with other intelligent devices in the same Field Control station A data group is a selected set of data that the BIU transfers from one location to another location in the station The BIU can transfer the group data during every sweep of its operations or only during specified sweeps This ability to skip group data transfers
264. t 4 Configuration 25 Circuit 12 Configuration 18 Circuit 5 Configuration 26 Circuit 13 Configuration 19 Circuit 6 Configuration 27 Circuit 14 Configuration 20 Circuit 7 Configuration 29 Circuit 15 Configuration 21 Circuit 8 Configuration 29 Circuit 16 Configuration Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Discrete Combination Input Output Modules Configuration Data Format Specify the actual slot number and a length of 20 Entering the Reference Addresses The reference addresses are the locations in the BIU s I Q AI or AQ memory used by the module s data In this module configuration only the input reference is the first non zero entry WITHOUT the corresponding bit set in byte 12 see below The output reference is the first non zero entry WITH the corresponding bit set In byte 12 bits 4 5 6 and 7 define the input reference For example if bit 6 of byte 12 is set to 1 and a reference is specified in bytes 8 and 9 inputs for the module will be mapped to the AI table Note that the entries must correspond properly or the BIU will reject the module configuration In a normal configuration for a combination discrete module inputs go to the I table and outputs go to the Q table In that case you enter the input reference in bytes 4 5 and the output reference in bytes 6 7 and set bit 4 of byte 12 to 1 All other reference address bytes and other input reference bits in byte 12 must be set
265. t data leneth 100257 100288 K Default BIU data type Next available reference lt gt chg entr This I O reference assignment screen shows the length and the next available reference address for each data type in BIU memory The 8 Point Analog Current Output Module is an intelligent module which uses more than one type of data up to 8 words of analog output data data type AQ on the Hand held Monitor E 0 4 bytes of discrete input data data type I for module and channel status Use of this data is optional E 0 2 bytes of discrete output data data type Q for clearing alarms Use of this data is optional The length is displayed in units that are appropriate for the data type analog output data is in words discrete inputs and outputs are in bits The asterisk indicates that the reference has not yet been defined The first screen shows references for discrete input I diagnostic data You can display the other BIU data types by pressing F3 toggle Press F4 enter when the desired data type is displayed If the starting reference and length for the data type are acceptable press F4 enter to accept them The asterisk will disappear 5 90 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping length or reference value press F3 change Then press F3 to select a data table data type S 1 I I Select table tgl e
266. t reference parameter screen B Press F1 lt from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel Pressing F1 lt from channel 1 displays the module s last reference parameter screen Press F4 zoom to go to the first configuration screen for the channel When in a channel specific configuration screen press the up arrow MENU key to go to that channel s header screen If the BIU and Hand held Monitor do not support display of channel headers the header screens do not appear and keys F1 lt and F2 gt are used to scroll through channel specific configuration screens The following features are configured for each channel Channel Active When a channel is configured as Active its analog output data is processed and its alarm conditions are returned When a channel is configured as Inactive its output goes to OmA and its alarm conditions are not returned although any alarms that were already set can still be cleared using discrete output Q data S 1 CH 1 ACTIVE lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 95 Scaling Range Scaling can be used to define a constant slope mapping from the value in engineering units sent by the BIU to a channel s output current The default scaling configuration selection 1 on this screen
267. t to be cleared in the PLC CPU and for the associated fault contact to be cleared Clearing faults with a Hand held Monitor alone does not remove them from the Fault Table or cause any associated FAULT contacts to stop passing power flow Clearing the I O Fault Table at the PLC causes the Bus Controller to send a Clear All Circuit Faults background message to all blocks on the bus Faults can be cleared from the Fault Table either from the fault table display or by the application program Clearing the fault table removes the faults it contains it does not clear fault conditions in the system If the condition that caused a fault still exists and is detected the fault will be reported again Note If faults are cleared from the PLC before the BIU has received outputs from the PLC some faults such as Loss of Module or Extra Module are lost Series 90 PLC PLC Fault Table The PLC Fault Table shows the station ID and the location in the station where the fault occurred 14 0 4 Serial Bus Address o Rack Slot Pressing the Clear key from this display clears the entire PLC Fault Table If there are no faults in the I O Fault Table then pressing Clear will also clear Bus Interface Unit faults Series Five or Series Six PLC If the host CPU is a Series Five or Series Six PLC faults from a Field Control station are displayed in the Genius Fault Table Faults from Field Control stations are identified as GENA faults The G
268. ta The data is stored beginning at the assigned register reference The sequence is discrete inputs then analog inputs then discrete outputs and analog outputs last Data lengths are equal to the amounts of I AI Q and AQ configured for the Bus Interface Unit Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Monitor Control I O Data Computer To utilize the Bus Interface Unit s I O data correctly a computer must know the sequence of modules in the station and the amount of input and output data each has For the PCIM QBIM and other GENI based interfaces the input and output data will occupy the Device Input and Output Tables at the segments associated with the serial bus address of the Bus Interface Unit I O Tables Input Table 32 segments 128 bytes each Output Table 32 segments 128 bytes each The Bus Interface Unit automatically sends all discrete inputs followed by all analog inputs from the station each bus scan The PCIM or QBIM places this data into its Input Segment The application program must read the Input Segment to obtain the input data from the PCIM or QBIM Input Table Segment for a Bus Interface Unit Discrete Inputs Bits number of bytes configured length 8 Analog Input Words number of bytes configured Al length X 2 The Output Segment is used similarly The application program must send to the PCIM or QBIM s Output Segment all the discrete
269. ta configured for the Bus Interface Unit was AQO101 all analog outputs would need to be located between AQ0101 and AQ0357 Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type To edit the module s configuration press F4 zoom Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 35 Default Outputs or Hold Last Values After zooming in from the reference address screen configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the module if it stops receiving actual output data from the network controller S1 Hld Lst State NO lt gt tgl entr 1 Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold outputs in their last states and supply that data to the module Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module s outputs and supply that data to the module instead Note This selection has no effect if the BIU itself fails 2 Press F4 to save the selection 3 Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Output Default Values If Hold Last State is set to NO the following screen appears S1 Out Def Ch 01 00000 lt gt entr 1 Enter output default values from the HHM keypad To enter a negative value press the minus key after entering the value 2 Use the F1 lt and F2 gt keys to select channels 3 Press F4 entr key to save the selection 4 Press F2
270. tected The BIU s network map defines the BIU memory locations of the data that is exchanged on the bus Starting references in I AI Q and AQ memory are sent If any length is zero the associated starting reference is ignored it is not meaningful Byte No Byte Description 0 Not used 1 Starting reference for discrete input data LSB 2 Starting reference for discrete input data MSB 3 Length of discrete input data in bytes 4 5 Starting reference of analog input Al data 6 Length of analog input Al data in bytes 7 8 Starting reference of discrete output Q data 9 Length of discrete output Q data in bytes 10 11 Starting reference of analog output AQ data 12 Length of analog output AQ data in bytes 13 15 Not used but these bytes must be present for correct length message How a Write Map Datagram Affects I O Modules in the Station 8 4 Receiving a Write Map datagram with different starting addresses and or lengths changes the memory assigned previously configured for the BIU s network map as explained above Because only data included within the map is exchanged on the bus the BIU responds to such changes in its network map by automatically reassigning the I O addresses of the modules in the station This assures that the I O data will continue to be exchanged on the bus It is important that the lengths supplied in the Write Map datagram accommodate all of the data that sho
271. tem The Genius bus is an industrially hardened Local Area Network LAN It passes I O control data and background information datagrams between the Bus Interface Unit and a Genius bus controller A Genius bus can support up to 32 devices Each Bus Interface Unit station counts as one device on the bus regardless of the number or type of modules present in the station Other devices on the same bus can be Field Control stations remote drops I O blocks Bus Controllers and Hand held Monitors Typical busses reserve one location for a Bus Controller and one for a Hand held Monitor leaving 30 for additional devices The illustration below shows a Series 90 70 PLC connected to a Genius bus with I O blocks and two Field Control stations Series 90 70 PLC Hand held Monitor Genius Bus The Host CPU The Genius Bus Interface Unit is ideally suited for use with a Series 90 70 or Series 90 30 PLC However any type of PLC or computer capable of controlling a Genius bus can be used as the host Possible hosts include Series Six PLCs Series Five PLCs and computers equipped with a PCIM Personal Computer Interface Module QBIM Q Bus Interface Module or a third party GENI based interface module including several in DCS system
272. terface Unit Configuration Data Format For the Bus Interface Unit the slot number is 0 The length varies Bytes 0 to 11 must be FF hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E Byte12 Fhblbhkhbkeh BSM State read onlv BSM Present 1 yes 0 no BSM Controller 1 yes 0 no BSM Forced 1 yes 0 no CPU Redundancy 00 no redundancy 01 Hot standbv 10 Duplex 11 reserved Duplex Default Configuration Protection read only pte 13 7 e s bb eh Serial Bus Address read only Baud Rate Code read only 0 153 6Kb ext 1 153 6 Kb std 2 76 8 Kb 3 38 4 Kb Fault Reporting Disabled 0 yes 1 no Byte 14 7 le 5 4 3 j2 1 lo unlabelled bits not used BSM Switch Time 0 2 5 sec 1 10 sec Byte 15 7 le 5 4 3 2 ji lo reserved Byte 16 fz fe s fa fs 2 ft Jo LSB O ries SiySeries Five Ret a ress aeir 7 lelela le lt louse eries Six Series Five Reference Read Only Byteig 7 6 5 p 3 l2 lo Configuration Length always 0 bytes in Write Configuration Sequence Byte19 7 E 5 p 3 2 f lo Diagnostic Length bytes read only always 5 Bytes 7 e Js 4 a 2 h Jo 20 to 26 reserved Byte27 7 e Jls J a 2 h Jo Sync Module Present slot 1 bit 0 slot 8 bit 7 Set a bit to 1 to indicate that the Svnc Module Micro Field Processor is in this slot Only 1 bit ma
273. terminals of the I O Terminal Block on which the module is installed Select Remote if the module will receive a cold junction compensation value from the controller via the BIU as analog output AQ data The value is in degrees C and includes 2 decimal places Select Fixed if you want to configure a specific reference value on a later screen The fixed value is configurable on a per channel basis Select None for measuring millivolt inputs or if cold junction will be maintained at zero degrees C 1 Use the F3 toggle key if you want to change the displayed Reference Junction type 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selection and go on to the next item Reference Junction Value If you selected Fixed for RJ Reference Junction Type enter the fixed value here The 01 in the display is a reminder that the value entered includes tenths and hundredths For example you would enter 5522 to specify a value of 55 22 millivolts The fixed value is added to the input millivolt value before linearization occurs The fixed value should be obtained from a table for the appropriate thermocouple type S 1 CH1 RJVAL 01 00000 lt gt chg entr 1 Use the F3 change key if you want to change the value and enter the new value 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 79 Offset The last selection for each channel is Offset Th
274. than the low alarm limit If alarm reporting is not wanted alarm limits can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be activated After entering the Low Alarm Limit press the F4 enter key Then enter the High Alarm Limit for the channel S 4 CH1 AL H 32000 lt gt chg entr That completes the configuration steps for one input channel on the 16 Point Grouped Analog Input module Continue as described above to configure the rest of the inputs Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 47 Configure an 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module S1 ALG281 1 0 F4 y S1 Al Al008 A100001 00008 F4 F2 S1 1 1 040 100001 00040 S1 Q Q008 Q00001 00008 S1 Module gt l DEFAULT ZERO F4 F2 S1 Module gt Al DEFAULT ZERO F4 F2 y 1 Network gt Q EFAULT ZERO F2 F1 S1 FILTERING 20MS F2 t Art S1 LINE FREQ 60 HZ F2 y Art S1 CH 1 CONFIG F1 F2 select channel Fa j S1 CH1 ACTIVE F2 y M S1 CH1 RANGE 10V to 10V F2 y dey S1 CH1 ENG LO 10000 F2 y F S1 CH1 ENG HI 10000 F2 y Afa S1 CH1 SPAN LO 10000 F2 y F1 S1 CH1 SPAN HI 10000 Fo y AFI S1 CH1 ALRM LO 10000 AA Fl S1 CH1 ALHI 10000 Ay BAN E Repeat for other channels F2 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 When you select Read from the empty slot HHM screen this mod
275. that it is possible to have no discrete inputs or outputs or no analog inputs or outputs Read I O Forces Reply Subfunction Code 41 hex This datagram provides the information requested by a Read I O Forces datagram Byte Description 0 Force Table Requested 0 input enable 1 output enable 2 input values 3 output values 1 128 Input Output force enable value table data For discrete data a in a bit position in the force enable table corresponds to an enabled force for that point For analog data the value FFFF hex in a word position in the enable table corresponds to an enabled force for an analog channel 8 32 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Read Slot Diagnostics Subfunction Code 42 hex This datagram can be used to read diagnostics information for a specific slot point or channel from a BIU This message does not provide channel or point information for intelligent modules which includes certain types of I O modules and Micro Field Processors Intelligent modules can be configured to provide the information automatically Byte Description 0 Slot number 1 8 Read Slot Diagnostics Reply GFK 0825F Subfunction Code 43 hex This datagram provides the information requested by a Read Slot Diagnostics datagram Byte Description 0 Slot number 1 8 1 Board Status for slot 2 Boa
276. the ranges for the types of units configured on this screen Notice that Tenths of Ohms units are unsigned Units Selected Integer Ranges Engineering Units Ranges Tenths of Degrees F or C 32767 to 32767 3276 7deg to 3276 7deg Tenths of Ohms 0 to 65535 0 Ohms to 6553 5 Ohms 5 68 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F RTD Type Select the RTD type that most closely matches the RTD used on that channel The table below has more information about RTD categories S 1 CH1 RTD TYPE 100 PT 385 lt gt tgl entr 1 Use the F3 toggle key if you want to change the displayed RTD type 2 Use the F4 enter key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item Selection Comments Selection Comments Selection Comments 10 PT 10 Ohm Platinum PT 100 PT 3916 100 Ohm Platinum 100 NI 618 100 Ohm Nickel At 0 deg C alpha 003916 DIN43760 alpha 00618 25 PT 25 Ohm Platinum IPTS 68 1K PT 375 1 KOhm Platinum 120 NI 672 120 Ohm Nickel at 0 deg C alpha 00375 alpha 00672 25 5 PT 392 25 5 Ohm Platinum alpha 10 CU 10 Ohm Copper at 604 NI FE 518 604 Ohm Nickel Iron at 00392 at 0 deg C Lab Std 25deg C IPTS 68 Odeg C alpha 00518 100 PT 385 100 Ohm Platinum 9 035 CU 427 9 035 Ohm Copper at IK NI FE 527 1 KOhm Nickel Iron at DIN43760 alpha 00385 25deg C alpha 00427 70deg F alpha 00527 100 PT 3902 100 Ohm Platinum
277. ting higher energy MOVs across the power lines for instance between Hot and Neutral and from line to frame ground safety ground This triangular configuration requires three MOVs for each long power feed If the total power feed length is about 100 feet or less one set of MOVs should be enough for any number of devices The axial leaded LA series of MOVs from Harris is often used The 14mm size model V130LA10 rated at 38 joules is usually sufficient The MOVs used should be able to handle most line transients Measurement of actual transients may be required in extreme cases to decide what MOVs to use GFK 0825F B 1 B 2 Suppression for Devices in an Enclosure For a group of devices installed in an enclosure the MOVs can be installed at the point where the power lines enter the enclosure Ideally MOVs should be used at each cabinet in the system for maximum protection The following illustration shows suppression on both power lines and the communications bus for modules in an enclosure Enclosure 46461 x Short Length of Bus to All Bus Interface Units Suppression at the Communications Line For an individual Bus Interface Unit suppression can be supplied by connecting two small MOVs from Serial 1 and Serial 2 to the Bus Interface Unit s Shield Out terminal __ bus cable not shown 46463 s O s2 SHLDIN O SHLD OUT Om MOVs Suitab
278. ting re sistor male dh Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 Connect to Last Device GFK 0825F Bus Connection for Critical Processes Bus connections are normally considered permanent They should never be removed while the bus is in operation the resulting unreliable data on the bus could cause hazardous control conditions If the bus controls critical processes that cannot be shut down the Terminal Block can be wired to the bus via an intermediate connector as shown below ERN l oN 0 U T SHLD OUT Shield Out a Shield In Serial 2 Serial 1 SHLD IN BIS EISSES XR The connector shown is A107204NL from Control Design 458 Crompton Street Charlotte NC 28134 Alternatively the wire ends can be soldered together before inserting them into the terminals When removing the Terminal Block cover the ends of the wires with tape to prevent shorting the signal wires to one another or to ground Both of these methods allow the Terminal Block to be removed while maintaining data integrity on the bus GFK 0825F Chapter 3 Installation 3 13 Installing the Bus Interface Unit on the Terminal Block End 1 Before installing a new Bus Interface Unit remove the cable slot View knockout on the end of
279. to the next screen GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 85 5 86 Circuit Configuration The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the Hand held Monitor and the BIU Channel Header If the BIU and Hand held Monitor support display of channel headers a header screen appears for each channel as shown below S 1 CH 1 CONFIG lt gt zoom A Press F2 gt from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel Pressing F2 gt from channel 8 displays the module s first reference parameter screen B Press F1 lt from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel Pressing F1 lt from channel displays the module s last reference parameter screen Press F4 zoom to go to the first configuration screen for the channel When in a channel specific configuration screen press the up arrow MENU key to go to that channel s header screen If the BIU and Hand held Monitor do not support display of channel headers the header screens do not appear and keys F1 lt and F2 gt are used to scroll through channel specific configuration screens The following features are configured for each channel Channel Active When a channel is configured as Active its analog output data is processed and its alarm conditions are returned When a channel is configured as Inactive its output goes to OmV and its alarm conditions are not retur
280. to the original slot configuration screen GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 23 Configure a Discrete Output Module S1 Mod Type Discrete Out 16 F4 y S1 Q 16 Q F4 y S1 Q 16 Q00001 Q00016 F4 y S1 Ref Address Q0001 F2 F1 S1 Hid Lst State NO S1 Out Def Pt 01 S1 Report Faults YES F2 5 24 After you accept a module into the slot a screen like this appears S 1 Q 16 Number of references for Q this module type tgl entr Assign I O References for the Module Specify the I O references to be used by the module For most applications you can simply have the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that memory type Alternatively you can enter specific references for the module A To assign the next available references just press F4 entr B If you want to change to another type of I O table press F3 toggle C If you want to assign specific references enter the starting address Press F4 entr For most applications all module references should fall within the network map configured for the Bus Interface Unit For local control a module can be configured outside the BIU network map In addition each data type I Q AI AQ has a total of 256 bytes allocated within the BIU So for each data type all references must be located within a 256 byte range For example if the starting address for output data configured fo
281. to zero Bytes 0 to 3 must be 21 hex 0 0 0 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 N 1 0 LSB 1 0 MSB Byte 4 7 Byte 5 7 Reference Address or all zeros N Byte 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB Q Reference Address or all zeros Byte 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSB Byte 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB Byte 9 7 le l5 Ja 3 2 1 0 mseg Al Reference Address or all zeros Byte 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB Byte 11 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSB AQ Reference Address or all zeros Byte12 7 Je 5 Ja s J2 fi o unlabelled bit must be 0 L Input Default or Hold Last State 0 default 1 hold last state Fault Reporting 0 enabled 1 disabled Output Default or Hold Last State Input Reference is table Input Reference is Q Table Input Reference is Al Table Input Reference is AQ Table Byte13 7 6 5 4 3 2 E lo reserved must be 0 Bytes 14 to 19 Output Circuit Configuration For each output content is 7 Je 5 Ja 3 2 1 o unlabelled bits must be 0 Output Default State 0 off 1 on Byte Byte Description 14 Output 1 Configuration 15 Output 2 Configuration 16 Output 3 Configuration 17 Output 4 Configuration 18 Output 5 Configuration 19 Output 6 Configuration GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 13 Conventional Analog Input Modules Configuration
282. tputs 100017 NETPRES Network presence status Q00001 STOUTS Station outputs 3 Add ladder logic like the following example to the application program GFK 0825F Chapter 4 Operation 4 19 Example Ladder Logic BLOCK DECLARA Input 17 comes sending outputs xits received da xdisappears Inpu IONS START OF PROGRAM LOGIC KKEKKKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK from the network and is always ON while the network is to the Field Control Station The MFP is set to defaul ta if the network disappears Therefore when the netwo1 t 17 will be OFF Input 17 is a heartbeat detecting the presence of network outputs When I17 is ON send all data received from the netrork to the output table to allow the network to control outputs on the station lt lt RUNG 6 STEP 0003 gt gt NETPRES I0017 MOVE_ INT NETOUTS STOUTS I0001 IN Q Q0001 LEN 00001 kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkk kxx xx k kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkk kxx xx k lt lt RUNG 8 STEP 00 kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkkkkxxk xxk7 When I17 is OFF the network is not present allow the MFP to control what data goes to the output table to control outputs on the station KKEKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKKK 06 gt gt
283. tside the BIU s I O map GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 93 5 94 Configure Local Default Outputs Next select the default output mode used for all channels in the event of a local module failure or reset This is not the same as the data defaults described on the previous page which are for the BIU The choices for local default output are A B ZERO The output of each channel goes to OmA in the event of a local failure or reset HOLD LAST The output of each channel is held at the last value latched by the D A converters in the event of a local failure or reset provided the appropriate user power supply is present S 1 LOC DEF OUT ZERO lt gt tgl entr If you want to change the displayed selection press F3 Tgl Use the F4 entr key to save the selection Press F2 gt to go to the next screen Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Circuit Configuration GFK 0825F The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the Hand held Monitor and the BIU Channel Header If the BIU and Hand held Monitor support display of channel headers a header screen appears for each channel as shown below S 1 CH 1 CONFIG lt gt zoom A Press F2 gt from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel Pressing F2 gt from channel 8 displays the module s firs
284. type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the network if it stops receiving inputs from the module S1 Hld Lst State NO lt gt tgl entr 1 Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold inputs in their last states and supply that data to the network Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module s inputs and supply that data to the network instead Note This selection has no effect if the BIU itself fails 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection GFK 0825F Chapter 5 Station Configuration 5 27 5 28 Default Outputs or Hold Last State You should also configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the module if it stops receiving outputs from the network S1 Hld Lst State NO lt gt tgl entr 1 Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold outputs in their last states and supply that data to the module Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module s outputs and supply that data to the module instead Note This selection has no effect if the BIU itself fails 2 Use the F4 entr key to save the selection If Hold Last State is set to NO the following screen appears Number of the point S1 Out Def Pt 01 at the cursor location 000000xx lt gt tgl entr 3 On this screen select a default state 1 or 0 for each output 4 Use the cursor keys to select outputs Use the F3 toggle key
285. uld be exchanged The data of any modules configured outside the BIU s network map will be scanned by the BIU but not exchanged on the bus For example suppose an I O station has three 16 point discrete input modules originally configured to use addresses 10001 through 10048 All of this input data is included in the BIU s network map and is sent on the bus Original Configuration Starting reference 100001 Length of data 6 bytes slot 4 slot 2 slot 3 s 100001 100009 100017 100025 100033 100041 100048 Later a Write Map datagram is sent to the BIU specifying a beginning address of 10065 and a length of 5 bytes for I data The BIU would automatically reassign starting addresses to the I O modules starting at 100065 However this would place 8 inputs 100105 through 100112 outside the network map and the BIU would no longer send those inputs to the host Write Map Datagram Starting reference 100065 Length of data 5 bytes slot 1 slot 2 a slot 3 s 100065 100073 100081 100089 100097 100105 100112 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Report Fault Datagram Format GFK 0825F The format of Report Fault datagrams sent by a Bus Interface Unit is shown below The Series 90 70 Bus Controller interprets this information automatically no datagram programming is required If the host is a Series Six or Serie
286. ule screen appears 8 2 ALG281 1 0 lt gt del zoom Assign I O References for the Module When you zoom into the module s slot a screen like this appears S 2 AI AT 008 AI01970 01977 Default data length De fault BIU data type Next available reference lt gt chg entr This screen shows the default table and length and the next available reference address in that table for that reference parameter The length is displayed in units that are appropriate for that data type AI and AQ are in words Q and I are in bits The asterisk indicates that this reference has not yet been defined If the present selection is acceptable press F4 enter to accept it The asterisk will disappear If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping length or reference value press F3 change S 2 AI AI Select table tgl entr From this screen you can display the other BIU data types by pressing F3 toggle Press F4 enter when the desired data type is displayed S 2 AI Select AI 008 length clr entr If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type press F3 clear to clear the length field Enter the new length from the keypad If you enter an invalid length the HHM prompts BAD LENGTH ERR GFK 0825F GFK 0825F After entering the correct length the offset starting reference screen appears The BIU automatically supplies the
287. ule type F4 y _ifsr me tgl entr 00001 100016 F4 y aa Assign I O References for the Module F2 y t Specify the I O references to be used by the module For most applications you can simply have the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that F2 y A F1 memory type Alternatively you can enter specific references for the module a Hid Lst State A To assign the next available references just press F4 entr B If you want to change to another type of I O table press F3 toggle C If you want to assign specific references enter the starting address Press F4 entr For most applications all module references should fall within the network map configured for the Bus Interface Unit For local control a module can be configured outside the BIU network map In addition each data type I Q AI AQ has a total of 256 bytes allocated within the BIU So for each data type all references must be located within a 256 byte range For example if the starting address for input data configured for the Bus Interface Unit was 101024 all module inputs would need to be located between 101024 and 103072 Discrete references are assigned on byte boundaries Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type For example S 1 I 16 I00001 100016 lt gt del zoom In the
288. ult is 153 6 K baud standard The Genius I O System User s Manual gives guidelines for baud rate selection Each device s communications baud rate must be the same as that used by all other devices on the bus or the bus will not operate Baud Rate 153 5k std lt gt tgl entr 1 If you want to go to the next screen without changing the baud rate press F2 gt If the baud rate should be changed press F3 toggle to display the other baud rate choices The asterisk means a choice now being displayed has been changed by pressing the F3 tgl key Baud Rate 76 8k x F3 tgl may be pressed to see other choices for lt gt tgl entr this item 2 When the desired baud rate appears press F4 enter On this screen only the asterisk will remain until you power cycle the Bus Interface Unit to implement the new baud rate Note If the baud rate is changed on any block that is currently installed on an operating bus it must be changed on all devices on that bus After changing the baud rate you must cycle power at the same time to all devices on the bus to use the new baud rate Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Select a Series Six or Series Five PLC Reference Address If the network controller is not a Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC no entry is necessary here Press F4 entr to go on If the network controller is a Series Six PLC or Seri
289. units entered in the following eight bytes must bits usually type Enter one of the following match the selected range If they do not the numbers 16 table module will reject the configuration 18 Q table If the range is 0 the span and engineering units 10 Al table are not used and the next eight bytes are not 42 43 Ch 1 Low Eng Units 32768 to 32767 20 21 Relative offset from start of table 44 45 Ch 1 High Eng Units 32768 to 32767 22 23 Byte length of the module s analog output data 46 47 Ch1 Low Span 0 to 20000 lt high 0 16 24 25 Memory type for the module s analog output 48 49 Ch1 High Span 0 to 20000 gt How data usually type AQ Enter one of the numbers listed above 26 27 Relative offset from start of table 50 59 Ch 2 parameters 28 29 Byte length of module s control output bits 0 60 69 Ch 3 parameters 2 30 31 Memory type for the module s control output 70 79 Ch 4 parameters bits usually type Q Enter one of the numbers listed above 32 33 Relative offset from start of table 80 89 Ch 5 parameters 34 35 Local Default Output 0 off 1 hold 90 99 Ch 6 parameters 36 37 BIU command timeout in milliseconds 100 109 Ch7 parameters 500 to 65535 38 39 Active Channels One bit per channel Foreach 110 119 Ch8 parameters channel 0 inactive 1 active Default is OxFF all active Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999
290. ut data Output circuits begin accepting CPU outputs If no CPU outputs are available the output will either go to its programmed default state or hold its last state according to the circuit s preselected configuration The only other action that removes forces is a configuration change to delete a module In that case forced data for that module is assumed obsolete and is discarded Notes Forcing supercedes all other considerations including default and hold last state If a discrete circuit configured to hold its last state is forced while the Bus Interface Unit is online the forced state is considered to be the last state If the BIU goes offline and the force is removed while offline the circuit remains forced rather than assuming its actual last state When the BIU goes back online the circuit will again accept outputs normally Overriding I O Circuits Overriding an I O circuit means changing its state or value in the PLC s Override Tables Overrides must be done from the PLC with the Bus Interface Unit online Results can be viewed on the programmer screen The override data is stored in the PLC and survives loss of power in the PLC However if power is lost at the PLC but not at the Bus Interface Unit the Bus Interface Unit operates as it normally does if CPU communications are lost Outputs go to their default state or hold their last state as configured Once power is restored at the PLC and CPU communications resume the
291. ut removing the wiring or reconfiguring the station 46457 f C 00000000 29988835 amp amp 8 Terminals for s power and communications I O Terminal Block wiring Connectors Connecting Cabl S able amp amp 000000000 O00000000 000000000 to next terminal block Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F GFK 0825F Functional Specifications Bus Interface Unit Reliability 24VDC Power Supply Input Nominal R ated Voltage Voltage Range Power Inrush Current Power Supply Output to I O modules Holdup Time More than 183 000 hours operation MTBF calculated 24 VDC 18 VDC to 30 VDC 16 8 Watts maximum at full load nominal voltage 15 50 Amps peak 3 mS maximum Inrush current is installation dependent See page 2 4 6 5 VDC 5 1 4 Amp maximum See page 2 4 10mS maximum from nominal input voltage 115VAC 125VDC P ower Supply Input Nominal Rated Voltage Voltage Range Frequency AC Power Inrush Current Power Supply Output to I O modules Holdup Time 115 VAC 125 VDC 90 to 135 VAC 105 to 150 VDC 47 to 63 Hz 115 VAC 48VA maximum at full load nominal voltage 125 VAC 24W maximum at full load nominal voltage 20 Amps peak 3 mS maximum 6 5 VDC 5 2 Amp maximum
292. utputs Bytes 0 and 1 Must Match 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 I O Scan Enable Disable 1 enable 0 disable Run Stop Local Programming FUTURE Network Enabled disabled 0 enable 1 disable Unused must be 0 Set Micro Field Processor Operating Mode Subfunction Code 21 hex This datagram can be used to set the operating mode of a Micro Field Processor in the I O Station Byte Value Description 0 F6 hex Message code k 18 hex Command code 2 Slot The slot number of the Micro Field Processor 3 0 Reserved 4 0 Offset of the Least Significant Byte of the data 5 0 Offset of the Most Significant Byte of the data 6 4 Data length 7 47 hex 8 45 hex 9 46 hex 10 0 Code to set Micro Field Processor mode 0 Stop No I O Mode GFK 0825F Chapter 8 Datagrams 8 29 Intelligent Analog Module Recalibration Datagram Subfunction Code 21 hex 8 30 This datagram can be used to recalibrate a 16 Point Analog Grouped module IC670ALG240 to restore the factory calibration or to place the module into warmup mode for recalibration Byte Value Description 0 F6 hex Message code 1 18 hex Command code 2 Slot The module s slot number 3 0 Reserved 4 0 Offset of the Least Significant Byte of the data 5 0 Offset of the Most Significant Byte of the data 6 length of data Data l
293. ve Thermocouple inputs to BIU input tables All submoves can be set to default to either Yes or No Submove 1 Moves diagnostic bits Source reference 100001 Destination reference 100121 Length 6 bytes Submove 2 moves analog inputs Source reference A100001 Destination reference A100021 Length 16 bytes Group Move 6 Source slot 0 Destination slot 4 move control outputs from BIU tables to Thermocouple module Submove 1 Source reference Q00025 Destination reference Q00001 Length 2 bytes Group Move 7 Source slot 1 Destination slot 0 move all outputs of MFP to BIU input tables All submoves are set to default to No Hold Last State Submove 1 Moves discrete inputs Source reference Q00001 Destination reference QO0001 Length 7 bytes Group Move 8 Source slot 0 Destination slot 1 move all inputs from station in BIU tables to MFP input table Submove 1 Source reference 100001 Destination reference 100001 Length 21 bytes Submove 2 Source reference A100001 Destination reference A100001 Length 56 bytes Appendix D Configuration Examples D 5 Example 5 Group Move A Field Control Station has a Genius BIU in slot 0 a Micro Field Processor in slot 1 and a Smart analog input module in slot 2
294. ws the maximum amount of each data type that may be configured in the network map and the highest reference address available for each type BIU Memory Used For Maximum Highest Available Type Length for Reference Address Network Map l discrete inputs and status data up to 1024 65535 from intelligent modules contiguous bits Q discrete outputs and fault clearing up to 1024 65535 for intelligent modules contiguous bits Al analog inputs up to 64 9999 contiguous words AQ analog outputs up to 64 9999 contiguous words Data to be exchanged on the bus must use references configured here Any I O modules or portions of modules configured outside the network map will be scanned by the Bus Interface Unit but the data will not be exchanged on the Genius network bus The I O references of modules in the I O station are configured separately Individual I O modules may be configured anywhere within available memory It is possible to have inputs or outputs within the I O station that are not exchanged on the Genius bus that is data that is completely local to the I O station For example the I O station might include a Micro Field Processor performing local data processing 5 16 Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Configuring Extra References in the BIU I O Map Normally there is no need to configure extra I O references in the BIU s network I O map Although unused references do not
295. y high isolation pulse transformer This permits the bus and the local logic to be at different voltage levels The pulse waveforms are bipolar see next section below to reduce DC baseline offsets in the waveform The daisy chained bus is shown on the left in the above illustration The SER 1 and SER 2 lines are merely tapped at the intermediate locations along the bus These connections must be consistent since the signal is polarized The shield of the cable is broken into segments at each location Each shield segment is DC grounded at one end SHIELD OUT and terminated with a small capacitor at the other SHIELD IN The segmenting breaks up long ground loop paths The capacitor termination reduces common mode noise from high frequency pickup while preventing large ground loop currents in the shield at low frequencies The alternately switching transistors produce a negative pulse followed by a positive pulse across SERIAL 1 relative to SERIAL 2 The bit waveform is a series of these pulses as will be shown later The transformer provides isolation 2500 volts test between the bus and the local logic permitting these to be at different voltages The internal resistors in each line provide current limit and some termination function during transmission The balanced differential signals on the twisted pair provide high noise immunity due to the magnetic H field cancellation effect of the twisting as well as electric E field reduction
296. y be set Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User s Manual October 1999 GFK 0825F Discrete Input Modules Configuration Data Format Specify the actual slot number and a length of 13 The reference address is the location in the BIU s I Q AI or AQ memory that is used by the module s data Specify only one address typically in the discrete input I table Set the other address selection bytes to all zeros Bytes 0 to 3 must be 45 hex 0 0 0 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB 7 16 5 4 3 2 11 JO MSB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 LSB 7 16 5 4 3 2 11 JO MSB 5 j4 3 1 J0 LSB 5 4 3 0 MSB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB 7 16 5 4 3 2 11 JO MSB 7 Je Jls Ja fs J2 hi Jo Chapter 8 Datagrams Reference Address or all zeros Q Reference Address or all zeros Al Reference Address or all zeros AQ Reference Address or all zeros unlabelled bits not used Input Default or Hold Last State 0 default 1 hold last state Fault Reporting 0 enabled 1 disabled 8 12 Discrete Output Modules Configuration Data Format Specify the actual slot number and a length of 30 The reference address is the location in the BIU s I Q AI or AQ memory that is used by the module s data Specify only one address typically in the

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

  160 W Elegante und schlanke Lautsprecher    Phonix IP5WB2 mobile phone case  Operating Instructions  Manuel d`instructions  YAMAHA X-MAX 250 2008  SilberSonne DL14CW6 LED lamp    Progress Lighting P5078-09 Installation Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file